Yamaha DVX-700 Handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: DVX-700

Categorie: Dvd spelers

Type: Handleiding

OWNER’S MANUAL

MODE D’EMPLOI

DVX-700

(DVR-700 + NS-PSW700 + NS-P700)

DVD HOME THEATER SYSTEM

SYSTEME HOME CINEMA AVEC LECTUER DVD

DVX-700

Printed in China WQ33520

LASER INFORMATION

INFORMATION LASER

● The name plate is located on the rear panel of the DVD

controller.

● La plaque signalétique se trouve sur le panneau arrière du

lecteur de DVD.

Without top cover

Sans couvercle supérieur

Caution-i En

• Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an

equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the

presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within

the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient

magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to

persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle

is intended to alert you to the presence of important

operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in

the literature accompanying the appliance.

1 Read these instructions.

2 Keep these instructions.

3 Heed all warnings.

4 Follow all instructions.

5 Do not use this apparatus near water.

6 Clean only with dry cloth.

7 Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance

with the manufacturer’s instructions.

8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat

registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers)

that produce heat.

9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or

grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with

one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two

blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the

third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug

does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for

replacement of the obsolete outlet.

10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched

particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point

where they exit from the apparatus.

11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the

manufacturer.

12 Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket,

or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold

with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use

caution when moving the cart/apparatus

combination to avoid injury from tip-over.

13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when

unused for long periods of time.

14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing

is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any

way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid

has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the

apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not

operate normally, or has been dropped.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Note to CATV system installer:

This reminder is provided to call the CATV system

installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that

provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in

particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be

connected to the grounding system of the building, as

close to the point of cable entry as practical.

CAUTION

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)

1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions

contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications

not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority,

granted by the FCC, to use the product.

2 IMPORTANT:

When connecting this product to accessories

and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables.

Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all

installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void

your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA.

3NOTE:

This product has been tested and found to comply with

the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B”

digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a

reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a

residential environment will not result in harmful interference with

other electronic devices.

This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not

installed and used according to the instructions found in the users

manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other

electronic devices.

Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that

interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is

found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by

turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the

problem by using one of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by

the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or

fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the

antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the

lead-in to coaxial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results,

please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of

product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please

contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe

Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620.

The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by

Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.

Caution-ii En

1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual

carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.

2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean

place — way from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,

dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least

5 cm on the top, left, right, and the back of this unit.

3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors,

or transformers to avoid humming sounds.

4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from

cold to hot, nor locate this unit in an environment with high

humidity (i.e., a room with a humidifier) to prevent

condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical

shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

5 Avoid installing this unit in a location where foreign objects

may fall onto this unit or where this unit may be exposed to

liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not

place:

– Other components, as they may cause damage and/or

discoloration on the surface of this unit.

– Burning objects (i.e., candles), as they may cause fire,

damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall, spilling

the liquid and causing an electrical shock to the user and/

or damage to this unit.

6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,

etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature

inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,

and/or personal injury.

7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections

are complete.

8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,

possibly causing damage.

9 Do not use excessive force on switches, knobs and/or cords.

10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet,

grasp the plug; do not pull the cord.

11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might

damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

12 Use only the voltage specified on this unit. Using this unit

with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may

cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

Yamaha will not be held responsible for any damage resulting

from use of this unit with a voltage other than as specified.

13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord out and

outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit

during a lightning storm.

14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified

Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The

cabinet should never be opened for any reason.

When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e.,

vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet.

16 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on

common operating errors before concluding that this unit is

faulty.

17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set the unit

in standby mode, then disconnect the AC power plug from the

wall outlet.

18 Condensation will form when the surrounding temperature

changes suddenly. Disconnect the power cable from the

outlet, then leave the unit alone.

19 When using the unit for a long time, the unit may become

warm. Turn the power off, then leave the unit alone for

cooling.

20 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power

plug can be reached easily.

21 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as

sunshine, fire or like.

22 Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones

can cause hearing loss.

23 When replacing the batteries, be sure to use batteries of the

same type. Danger of explosion may happen if batteries are

incorrectly replaced.

Caution: read this before operating your unit.

This unit is not disconnected from the AC power

source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet,

even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called

the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to

consume a very small quantity of power.

Laser component in this product is capable of emitting

radiation exceeding the limit for Class 1.

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC

SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN

OR MOISTURE.

CAUTION

Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.

Replace only with the same or equivalent type.

FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to

wide slot and fully insert.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian

ICES-003.

IMPORTANT

Please record the serial number of this unit in the space

below.

MODEL:

Serial No.:

The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.

Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future

reference.

Caution-iii En

LASER SAFETY

This unit employs a laser. Due to possible eye injury, only a

qualified service person should remove the cover or attempt

to service this device.

DANGER

This unit emits visible laser radiation when open.

Avoid direct eye exposure to beam. When this unit is plugged

into a wall outlet, do not place your eyes close to the opening

of the disc loader and other openings or look inside.

LASER

Type Semiconductor laser ALGaInP

Wave length 655nm (DVD)

790nm (VCD/CD)

Output Power 5/7mW (DVD/VCD,CD)

Beam divergence 20degrees

CAUTION

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures

other than those specified herein may result in hazardous

radiation exposure.

1 En

English

INTRODUCTION.................................................. 2

Main unit......................................................................... 4

Supplied accessories ....................................................... 4

FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW.................................. 5

Front panel (DVR-700) .................................................. 5

Rear panel (DVR-700).................................................... 6

Front panel display (DVR-700)...................................... 7

Rear panel (NS-PSW700)............................................... 8

Remote control ............................................................... 9

CONNECTIONS................................................. 11

Roles and layout of the speakers .................................. 11

Placing the speakers using the stands ........................... 12

Placing the speakers on a wall...................................... 12

SYSTEM CONNECTIONS................................. 14

Connecting the speakers ............................................... 14

Connecting the DVD controller and the subwoofer/system

control ...................................................................... 16

OTHER CONNECTIONS ................................... 17

Connecting a TV........................................................... 17

Connecting an HDMI component................................. 18

Connecting the FM antenna.......................................... 18

Connecting external AV components........................... 19

Connecting the power cable ......................................... 20

GETTING STARTED ......................................... 21

Inserting batteries into the remote control.................... 21

Using the remote control .............................................. 21

Turn on the system ....................................................... 22

Setting the video input/output....................................... 23

Setting language preferences ........................................ 25

DISC OPERATION ............................................ 26

Playing discs ................................................................. 26

Basic playback controls ................................................ 27

Ejecting a disc............................................................... 28

Using the disc menu (DVD only) ................................. 28

Playback control (PBC) (Video CD only).................... 28

Changing soundtrack language..................................... 28

Changing subtitle language .......................................... 29

Resuming playback from the last stopped point........... 29

Viewing from another angle ......................................... 29

Displaying disc information ......................................... 29

Zooming in ................................................................... 29

Advanced operation ...................................................... 30

Disc navigator............................................................... 32

PLAYING OTHER DISCS.................................. 33

To play back audio files................................................ 33

To start a slide show of JPEG files............................... 34

Selecting a file to play back.......................................... 34

Using a USB device...................................................... 35

DVD SETUP MENU OPTIONS.......................... 36

Menu overview ............................................................. 36

VIDEO ADJUST MENU ..................................... 37

INITIAL SETTINGS MENU ................................ 38

Video Output................................................................. 38

Language....................................................................... 40

Display .......................................................................... 41

Options .......................................................................... 41

AIR SURROUND XTREME................................ 43

What is AIR SURROUND XTREME? ........................ 43

Listening to surround mode of AIR SURROUND

XTREME.................................................................. 43

Shifting the optimum listening area from side to side .. 44

Selecting the optimum distance between the

speakers .................................................................... 44

Checking the virtual surround effect............................. 45

Using extended stereo mode ......................................... 45

Setting compressed music enhancer ............................. 45

LISTENING TO FM BROADCASTS.................. 46

Basic tuning operation .................................................. 46

Using station preset feature........................................... 47

Recalling the preset stations.......................................... 49

LISTENING TO XM

SATELLITE RADIO

BROADCASTS .............................................. 50

Connecting XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock..................... 50

Activating XM Satellite Radio...................................... 50

Basic XM Satellite Radio operations ............................ 51

Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset channels............ 52

Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information ........... 53

LISTENING TO SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO™

BROADCASTS .............................................. 54

Connecting the SiriusConnect™ tuner.......................... 54

Activating SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ subscription....... 55

Basic SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ operations.................. 55

Setting the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ preset channels.. 57

Setting the Parental Lock .............................................. 58

Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™

information ............................................................... 59

USING OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT ...................... 60

Using iPod™................................................................. 60

Using Bluetooth™ components .................................... 61

USEFUL OPERATION....................................... 63

Adjusting the audio delay ............................................. 63

Listening at low volume (night listening mode) ........... 63

Adjusting the audio balance for the playback............... 64

Changing the brightness of the front panel display....... 64

Setting the sleep timer................................................... 65

System menu ................................................................. 65

Setting the preset code .................................................. 66

TROUBLESHOOTING....................................... 67

GLOSSARY ....................................................... 74

SPECIFICATIONS ............................................. 76

INDEX................................................................. 77

LIST OF PRESET CODES.............................................. i

LIST OF COUNTRY CODES....................................... ii

LIST OF LANGUAGE CODES................................... iii

CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION

2. CONNECTIONS

3. PREPARATION

4. BASIC OPERATIONS

5. DVD SETUP MENU

6. OTHER FUNCTIONS

7. USEFUL OPERATION

8. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

APPENDIX

2 En

INTRODUCTION

Thank you for purchasing this unit. This Owner’s Manual

explains the basic operation of this unit.

Notes about discs

– This DVD controller is designed for use with the

following discs.

Notes

– DVD-R/-RW/-R DL and DVD+R/+RW/+R DL

discs recorded in DVD-Video compatible format.

– DVD-R/-RW/-R DL discs recorded in VR format

(compatible with CPRM).

– CD-R/RW, DVD-R/-RW/-R DL and DVD+R/

+RW/+R DL cannot be played unless finalized.

– Multi-session discs are not supported.

– Some discs recorded on PC cannot be played

depending on the settings of the application

software.

– Discs recorded on PC in packet write format are

not compatible with this DVD controller.

– This unit is not compatible with 8-cm discs.

This controller can play the following formatted files

recorded on CD-R/RW, DVD-R/-RW, DVD+R/+RW and

USB device.

Compressed audio file

– MPEG1 audio layer3 (MP3)

– Windows Media Audio (WMA)

– MPEG-4 AAC

Still image file

–JPEG

– FUJICOLOR CD

– KODAK Picture CD

Movie file

(except files saved on USB devices)

–WMV

–DivX

Ultra

– Official DivX

Ultra Certified product.

– Plays all versions of DivX

video (including

DivX

6) with enhanced playback of DivX

media files and the DivX

Media Format.

Hint

Refer to “DISC OPERATION” on page 26 for details.

Cleaning discs

– When a disc becomes dirty, clean it with a cleaning

cloth. Wipe the disc from the center out. Do not

wipe in a circular motion.

– Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner,

commercially available cleaners, or antistatic spray

intended for analog records.

Avoid high temperatures, moisture, water

and dust

– Do not expose the system, batteries or discs to

humidity, rain, sand or excessive heat (caused by

heating equipment or direct sunlight).

Avoid condensation problem

– The lens may cloud over when the controller is

suddenly moved from cold to warm surroundings,

making it impossible to play a disc. Leave the

controller in the warm environment until the

moisture evaporates.

Disc care

– Write only on the printed side of a CD-R/RW,

DVD-R/-RW/-R DL, DVD+R/+RW/+R DL and

only with a soft felt tipped pen.

– Handle the disc by its edge; do not touch the

surface.

Lens care

– Basically, lens cleaning is not necessary.

– Do not use lens cleaner because it may cause

malfunction.

Cabinet care

– Use a soft cloth slightly moistened with a mild

detergent solution. Do not use a solution containing

alcohol, spirits, ammonia, or abrasives.

Choosing a suitable location

– Place the controller on a flat, hard, and stable

surface.

INTRODUCTION

DVD disc: DVD-Video, DVD-R/-RW/-R

DL, DVD+R/+RW/+R DL

Compact Disc: Audio CD, CD-R, CD-RW,

Video CD, Super Video CD

3 En

INTRODUCTION

English

INTRODUCTION

Region codes

The unit is designed to support the Region Management

System. Check the region code number on the disc

package. If the number does not match the unit’s region

number (Refer to the table below or the back of the unit),

the unit may be unable to play the disc.

Features

Destination

Region code

of DVR-700

Playable discs

U.S.A., and

Canada model

Europe

model

Asia and Taiwan

models

Australia

model

Russia

model

1 1

ALL

2 2

ALL

3 3

ALL

4 4

ALL

5 5

ALL

Manufactured under license from Dolby

Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”,

“MLP Lossless” and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

“DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are

registered trademarks of DTS, Inc.

DivX

, DivX

Ultra Certified, and

associated logos are trademarks of

DivX

, Inc. and are used under license.

HDMI, the HDMI logo and High

Definition Multimedia Interface are

trademarks or registered trademarks of

HDMI Licensing LLC.

The XM name and related logos are

registered trademarks of XM Satellite

Radio Inc.

“SIRIUS”, “SiriusConnect”, the SIRIUS

dog logo, channel names and logos are

trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.

“Apple”, “iPod”, and “iTunes” are trademarks of Apple Inc.,

registered in the U.S. and other countries.

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG and is used

by Yamaha in accordance with a license agreement.

Windows Media is either a registered trademark or trademark of

Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

This product incorporates copyright protection

technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other

intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright

protection technology must be authorized by

Macrovision, and is intended for home and other

limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized

by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly

is prohibited.

This system employs new technologies and algorithms

that make it possible to achieve 7-channel surround

sound with only two speakers, and without using wall

reflections.

4 En

INTRODUCTION

■ Main unit ■ Supplied accessories

Speaker (L/R)

(NS-P700)

Subwoofer/system control

(NS-PSW700)

DVD controller

(DVR-700)

Speaker package

SLEEP

NIGHT

ENHANCER

AUDIO DELAY

AUDIO

PLAY MODE

INFO.

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

TOP MENU

SETUP RETURN

CODE SET

ANGLE

CLEAR

MEMORY

LOCK

SUBTITLE

AUTO

MANUAL

PRESET/CH

ENTER

STB

TV VOL

VOLUME

TUNER MUTE

TV INPUT

DVD

USB INPUT 1-4

POSITION

AREA SOUND TEST

DOCK

SRCH MODE

STEREO

ON SCREEN

ZOOM

ON OFF

BLUETOOTH

DISP. MODE

GAMESPORTS

MUSIC

FUNC.

WP87010DVX-700

TV STB

POWER

STANDBY

10KEY

MOVIE

OWNER’S MANUAL

MODE D’EMPLOI

DVX-700

(DVR-700 + NS-PSW700 + NS-P700)

DVD HOME THEATER SYSTEM

SYSTEME HOME CINEMA AVEC LECTUER DVD

Remote control

Battery x 2

(AA, R6, UM-3)

System control cable (4 m)

Speaker cable x 2 (4 m)

Video pin cable (1.5 m)

Indoor FM antenna

Cover

(For NS-PSW700)

Screw x 6

(for cover 3 x 6 mm)

Stand x 2

(For NS-P700)

Screw x 2

(for stand 4 x 10 mm)

Owner’s Manual

(U.S.A., Canada,

Asia and Taiwan

models)

(Europe, Russia

and Australia

models)

5 En

English

INTRODUCTION

■ Front panel (DVR-700)

1 STANDBY/ON

Turns on the system, or sets it to standby mode

(Page 22).

2 Disc loading slot

Insert a disc to be played.

3 EJECT

Ejects a disc in the DVD controller.

4 s

Stops playback.

5 e

Pauses playback.

6 h

Starts playback.

7 INPUT

Selects an input source by pressing repeatedly.

8 VOLUME u / d

Adjusts the volume level.

9 Remote control sensor

Point the remote control towards this sensor.

0 Power indicator

Lights up when system is on.

A Front panel display

Shows information about the operational status of the

unit.

B USB terminal

Connect to the USB connector of your USB device

(Page 35).

FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW

STANDBY / ON

EJECT INPUT

USB

12 345678

B09A

6 En

FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW

■ Rear panel (DVR-700)

1 SYSTEM CONNECTOR terminal

Connect to the subwoofer/system control (Page 16).

2 COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT jacks

Connect to the Y PB/CB PR/CR jacks on your TV

(Page 17).

3 VIDEO OUTPUT jack

Connect to the video (composite) jack on your TV

(Page 17).

4 HDMI OUTPUT terminal

Connect to the HDMI input terminal on your TV

(Page 18).

SYSTEM

CONNECTOR

NS-PSW700

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

OUTPUT

HDMI

OUTPUT

1234

7 En

FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW

English

INTRODUCTION

■ Front panel display (DVR-700)

1 Decoder indicators

The respective indicator lights up when any of the

decoders of the system is functioning.

2 DOCK indicator

– Lights up when the system is receiving a signal

from an iPod stationed in the Yamaha iPod

universal dock (such as YDS-10 or YDS-11, sold

separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of the

subwoofer/system control (Page 20).

– Lights up while the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless

audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately) is

connected to the Bluetooth component (Page 61).

– Flashes while the connected Yamaha Bluetooth

wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold

separately) and the Bluetooth component are

pairing or while the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless

audio receiver is searching for the Bluetooth

component (Page 61).

3 ENHANCER indicator

Lights up when compressed music enhancer mode is

selected (Page 45).

4 NIGHT indicator

Lights up when you select night listening mode

(Page 63).

5 SLEEP indicator

Lights up when sleep mode is on (Page 65).

6 Tuner indicators (AUTO/TUNED/STEREO/

MEMORY/HOLD)

AUTO indicator

Lights up when the system is in automatic tuning

mode (Page 46).

TUNED indicator

Lights up when the system is receiving a station

(Page 46).

STEREO indicator

Lights up when the system is receiving a strong signal

from an FM stereo broadcast in automatic tuning

mode (Page 46).

MEMORY indicator

Flashes to show a station can be stored (Page 47).

HOLD Indicator

Flashes while holding the XM/SIRIUS information

(Page 53, 59).

7 XM indicator

Lights up when the input source is XM Mini-Tuner

(Page 50).

8 SIRIUS indicator

Lights up when the input source is SiriusConnect

tuner (Page 54).

9 Multi information display

Shows the playing time. When you adjust or change a

setting, the value is displayed.

0 MUTE indicator/VOLUME indicator

– Flashes while the mute function is activated.

– Indicates the current volume level.

12345

678

8 En

FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW

■ Rear panel (NS-PSW700)

1 ANTENNA terminal

Connect the FM antenna.

2 INPUT 1/2 OPTICAL jacks

Connect to the DIGITAL OUT jack (Optical Type) on

your digital audio component.

These input jacks support PCM, Dolby Digital, and

DTS bitstream.

3 INPUT 3 COAXIAL jack

Connect to the DIGITAL OUT jack (Coaxial Type) on

your digital audio component.

This input jack support PCM, Dolby Digital, and DTS

bitstream.

4 INPUT 4 ANALOG jacks

Connect to the ANALOG OUT jack if the component

does not have DIGITAL OUT jacks.

5 DOCK terminal

Connect the Yamaha iPod Universal Dock (such as

YDS-10 or YDS-11, sold separately) or Yamaha

Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10,

sold separately) (Page 20).

6 SIRIUS terminal

Connect to a SiriusConnect tuner (sold separately).

7 XM terminal

Connect to an XM Mini-Tuner and XM Mini-Tuner

Home Dock (sold separately).

8 SYSTEM CONNECTOR terminal

Connect to the DVD controller.

9 SPEAKER terminals

Connect to the speakers.

0 Power cable

Connect to a standard AC outlet.

UNBAL

ANTENNA

INPUT

DOCK

SYSTEM

CONNECTOR

DVR

700

SPEAKERS

MAINS

SPEAKER

IMPEDANCE

MIN.

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

ANALOG

SIRIUS

9 En

FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW

English

INTRODUCTION

■ Remote control

1 STANDBY/ON ( )

Turns on the this system, or sets it to the standby

mode.

2 FUNC./10KEY

Switches the operation of the Function/Numeric

keypad keys. Also, the preset code to operate TV or

STB.

Hint

Using the remote control, you can operate two kinds

of peripheral devices such as TV and satellite tuner.

When operating them, you need to set the preset codes

depending on the components. Refer to “Setting the

preset code” on page 66.

3 POWER

Turns on the TV.

Note

To operate your TV with the remote control, you need

to set the preset code. Refer to “Setting the preset

code” on page 66.

4 Function / Numeric keypad 0-9

Operates some functions, such as AIR SURROUND

XTREME, and enters track numbers or other

numbers.

The available operation will be changed depending on

the FUNC./10KEY position.

SLEEP

NIGHT

ENHANCER

AUDIO DELAY

AUDIO

PLAY MODE

INFO.

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

TOP MENU

SETUP RETURN

CODE SET

ANGLE

CLEAR

MEMORY

LOCK

SUBTITLE

AUTO

MANUAL

PRESET/CH

ENTER

STB

TV VOL

VOLUME

TUNER MUTE

TV INPUT

DVD

USB INPUT 1-4

POSITION

AREA SOUND TEST

DOCK

SRCH MODE

STEREO

ON SCREEN

ZOOM

ON OFF

BLUETOOTH

DISP. MODE

GAMESPORTS

MUSIC

FUNC.

WP87010DVX-700

TV STB

POWER

STANDBY

10KEY

MOVIE

FUNC./10KEY: FUNC. side

MOVIE

MUSIC

SPORTS

GAME

Select surround mode.

STEREO – Turns extended stereo mode

on and off alternately

(Page 45).

– Turns surround mode off

(Page 43).

ENHANCER Turns compressed music

enhancer mode on and off

alternately (Page 45).

NIGHT Turns night listening mode on

and off alternately (Page 63).

SLEEP Sets the sleep timer (Page 65).

DISP. MODE Changes the brightness of the

front panel display (Page 64).

AUDIO DELAY Delays the output sound to

synchronize it with the video

image (Page 63).

ZOOM Enlarges the pictures while

playing DVD.

Hint

This button can be used

regardless of the FUNC./10KEY

position.

ON SCREEN Displays the disc information on

the TV display.

Hint

This button can be used

regardless of the FUNC./10KEY

position.

FUNC./10KEY: 10KEY side

Enters numeric characters using 0 to 9 buttons.

10 En

FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW

5 AUDIO

Selects an audio language for the DVD that is playing

(if available).

6 SUBTITLE

Selects a subtitle language for the DVD that is playing

(if available).

7 ANGLE

Selects a camera angle for the DVD that is playing (if

available).

8 PLAY MODE

Displays the Play Mode menu.

9 s

Stops playback.

0 CLEAR

Erases the registered track/chapter order.

A w (LOCK)

Rewinds the disc.

SIRIUS: Sets a parental lock.

B e

Pauses playback.

C f

Fast-forwards the disc.

D b (SRCH MODE)

Selects the previous track or chapter.

XM/SIRIUS: Selects the search mode.

E h (AUTO/MANUAL)

Starts playback.

FM: selects auto/manual tuning (Page 46).

F a (MEMORY)

Selects the next track or chapter.

FM: registers the radio frequency.

G TOP MENU (INFO.)

Displays the top-level disc menu.

iPod: switches operation mode of the iPod.

H MENU

Displays the disc contents menu.

I Cursors ( / / / )

Selects items or changes values in the menu screen.

– Tuning the FM station.

– Controlling an iPod.

– Changing the settings.

J ENTER

Confirms a selection.

K SETUP

Displays the DVD setup menu.

L RETURN (CODE SET)

– Returns to the previous screen when DVD setup

menu is displayed.

– Use to set the preset code. Refer to “Setting the

preset code” on page 66.

M TV/STB control buttons

TV VOL +/–

Adjusts the TV volume level.

CH +/–

Select the TV channel.

TV INPUT

Selects the TV input.

Note

To operate your TV with the remote control, you need

to set the preset code. Refer to “Setting the preset

code” on page 66.

You can select TV or STB by switching FUNC./

10KEY.

N VOLUME +/–

Adjusts the volume level of DVX-700.

O MUTE

Mutes the volume of DVX-700. Press the button again

to mute OFF.

P Input selection buttons

DVD/USB

Switches the input source to DVD or USB. Each time

you press the button, the input source changes in

sequence.

TUNER

Switches the input source to FM/XM/SIRIUS.

INPUT 1-4

Switches the input source to the external input. Each

time you press the button, the input source changes in

sequence from input 1 to input 4.

DOCK

Switches the input source to DOCK.

Selects iPod or Bluetooth as the input source

depending on the option connected to the Dock

terminal.

Q POSITION

Shifts the optimum listening area according to your

listening position (Page 44).

R AREA

Sets the distance between speakers for the best

surround effect (Page 44).

S SOUND

Adjusts the volume balance for the virtual speaker and

subwoofer (Page 64).

T TEST

Outputs the test tone (Page 45).

11 En

English

CONNECTIONS

■ Roles and layout of the speakers

To enjoy quality sounds, you need to place the speakers in their appropriate positions and install them correctly.

The following shows the recommended layout of the speakers.

1 Speaker (L, R)

Produces front channel (stereo) sounds. Also produces virtual center channel sounds (dialogue, etc.) and virtual

surround channel sounds effectively using the Yamaha front surround system.

Place the left and right speakers at equal distances away from the listening position so that you can produce high

quality surround sound. You can install the speakers on a rack using the stands or on a wall.

2 Subwoofer/system control

The subwoofer produces bass sounds and LFE sounds contained in Dolby Digital or DTS. Place the subwoofer in the

front of the listening position. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections.

Notes

– To avoid magnetic interference, do not position the speakers too close to your TV.

– Allow adequate ventilation around the DVD controller and subwoofer/system control.

– Bass sounds produced by the subwoofer may be heard differently depending on the listening position and

subwoofer location.

To enjoy desired sounds, try to change the location of the subwoofer according to the listening position.

– You can adjust the surround effect by arranging the position of the speakers (Page 46).

CONNECTIONS

When placing the speakers on a rack When placing the speakers on a wall

DVD controller

CONNECTIONS

12 En

■ Placing the speakers using the

stands

You can place the speakers in an upright position or a

horizontal position. Put the speakers on the stands and

secure them with the screws.

When placing the speaker in an

upright position

Place the speaker on the stand vertically, and then secure it

with the screw as shown in the illustration.

When placing the speakers in a

horizontal position

Put the speaker on the stand so that the black side of the

speaker becomes outside, and then secure it with the screw

as shown in the illustration.

■ Placing the speakers on a wall

Put the speakers on a wall using commercially available

screws. Refer to the illustration below for the screw size.

1 When placing the speakers on a wall, remove the

stands.

2 Install screws on a wall as shown in the illustration.

The distance between the screws: 126 mm for both

sides

3 Insert the screws into the holes on the back of the

speaker.

Notes

– To attach the speaker to a wall with screws, the

wall must be firm. If not you may cause the speaker

to fall.

Tapping screw (Available at the hardware store)

Dia.4 mm (1/8")

Installing on a plaster wall.

Installing on a firm wall.

Min 20 mm

(3/4")

5 mm

(1/4")

Min 20 mm

(3/4")

5 mm

(1/4")

PlasterPillar

or lumber

Pillar

or lumber

126 mm (5")

CONNECTIONS

13 En

English

CONNECTIONS

– Use commercially available screws that can

support the weight of the installation.

– Make sure you use specified screws to attach the

speakers to a wall. Using clamps other than

specified screws, such as short screws, nails, or

two-sided tape, may cause the speaker to fall.

– After attaching the speakers, check that the

speakers are installed securely. Yamaha will bear

no responsibility for any accidents caused by

improper installations.

14 En

■ Connecting the speakers

Note

Do not connect the power cable of the subwoofer/system control into an AC outlet until all cable connections are

completed.

SYSTEM CONNECTIONS

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

OUTPUT

HDMI

OUTPUT

SYSTEM

CONNECTOR

NS-PSW700

MAINS

SYSTEM

CONNECTOR

DVR

700

SPEAKERS

SPEAKER

IMPEDANCE

MIN.

Speaker (R)

Subwoofer/system control

DVD controller

Speaker (L)

SYSTEM CONNECTIONS

15 En

English

CONNECTIONS

Connecting the speakers and

subwoofer/system control

Connecting the speakers

Confirm the plug colors of the speaker cables.

– Speaker cable with white plug: for speaker (L)

– Speaker cable with red plug: for speaker (R)

1 Push down the knob of the speaker terminal.

2 Insert the stripped speaker cable into the hole on the

speaker terminal.

Note

Connect the cable with red tube to the positive

terminal, and the other cable to the negative terminal.

3 Release the knob of the speaker terminal.

Connecting the subwoofer/system control

1 Insert the speaker cable plug until you hear a click

sound.

Note

Make sure that the cable plugs are connected to the

subwoofer/system control terminals of the same color.

2 Use the same procedure to connect the other speaker

cable.

for speaker (R):

Red plug

for speaker (L):

White plug

Red tube

MAINS

SYSTEM

CONNECTOR

DVR

700

SPEAKERS

SPEAKER

IMPEDANCE

MIN.

from speaker (L)

from speaker (R)

SYSTEM CONNECTIONS

16 En

■ Connecting the DVD controller

and the subwoofer/system

control

Connect the SYSTEM CONNECTOR terminal at the rear

of the subwoofer/system control to the SYSTEM

CONNECTOR terminal at the rear of the DVD controller

using the system control cable.

Notes

– Make sure that the system control cable is correctly

connected. Improper connections may damage the

system due to a short-circuit.

– To prevent unwanted noise, do not place the

subwoofer too close to the DVD controller, AC

power adaptor, TV or other sources of radiation.

– Do not insert the Power cable to an AC outlet until

all connections are completed.

MAINS

SYSTEM

CONNECTOR

DVR

700

SPEAKERS

SPEAKER

IMPEDANCE

MIN.

VID

COMPONENT

VIDEO

OUTPUT

SYSTEM

CONNECTOR

NS-PSW700

SYSTEM

CONNECTOR

Tighten the screws.

17 En

English

CONNECTIONS

■ Connecting a TV

Notes

– You only need to make one video connection from

the following options (A or B), depending on the

capabilities of your TV.

– Do not connect the power cables until all cable

connections are completed.

COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT jacks

<A>

Use the component video cables (Green/Blue/Red, not

supplied) to connect the DVD controller’s Y P

B PR jacks

to the corresponding component video input jacks (or the

Y PB/CB PR/CR YUV jacks) on your TV.

Progressive scan video quality is only available when

using Y P

B PR in conjunction with a progressive scan TV.

To activate the progressive scan function, refer to

“Selecting the output type for COMPONENT VIDEO

OUTPUT jacks” on page 24.

VIDEO OUTPUT jack <B>

Use the Video pin cable (yellow-supplied) to connect the

DVD controller’s VIDEO OUTPUT jack to the video

input jack (or A/V In/Video In/Composite/Baseband jack)

on your TV.

OTHER CONNECTIONS

<A> <B>

SYSTEM

CONNECTOR

NS-PSW700

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

OUTPUT

DVD controller

OTHER CONNECTIONS

18 En

■ Connecting an HDMI component

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first

industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital A/V (audio/

video) interface.

By connecting to an HDMI component (such as a TV),

you can enjoy standard, enhanced or high-definition video

as well as digital audio using a single cable.

When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth

Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure

audio/video interface that meets the security requirements

of content providers and system operators.

For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website

at “http://www.hdmi.org/”.

Viewing and Listening to playback

from an HDMI component

To output an HDMI signal, you need to configure the

settings manually. It is necessary to prepare in advance to

output an HDMI signal.

1 Set the system to standby mode.

2 Connect the HDMI terminals on your HDMI

compatible device and the DVD controller using a

commercially available HDMI cable.

3 To output an audio signal from the DVD controller to

the HDMI compatible device, refer to “System menu”

on page 65.

After doing the settings, set the DVD controller to

standby mode, and then turn on the system again.

4 To set the video output according to the HDMI

compatible device, refer to “Video Output” on

page 38 to access the DVD setup menu, and then set

the two items under Video output in the system menu.

– HDMI Resolution

– HDMI Color

Notes

– This unit is designed to connect to HDMI

compatible devices. If you connect to the DVI

component, the system may not operate correctly.

– The DVD controller is not compatible with HDCP-

incompatible HDMI or DVI components.

– You need a commercially available HDMI/DVI

conversion cable when you connect the DVD

controller to other DVI components.

– If you connect the system to the DVI component

with a HDMI/DVI conversion cable, the HDMI

terminal of the DVD controller does not output any

audio signals.

– Do not disconnect or connect the HDMI cable from

the DVD controller or turn off the power of the

HDMI/DVI component connected to the HDMI

OUTPUT terminal of the DVD controller while

data is being transferred. Doing so may disrupt

playback or cause noise.

– PCM signal downmixed to two channels can be

output from the HDMI output terminal.

■ Connecting the FM antenna

Connect an indoor FM antenna to the ANTENNA

terminal. Extend the FM antenna and fix its ends to the

wall.

For better FM stereo reception, connect an external FM

antenna.

Notes

– Adjust the position of the antenna for optimal

reception.

– Position the antenna as far as possible from your

TV, VCR or other sources of radiation to prevent

unwanted interference.

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

OUTPUT

HDMI

OUTPUT

HDMI

DVD controller

UNBAL

ANTENNA

INPUT

Subwoofer/system control

OTHER CONNECTIONS

19 En

English

CONNECTIONS

■ Connecting external AV

components

If you connect external AV equipment, such as a VCR or

cassette deck, to the audio input terminal on the

subwoofer/system control, you can listen to those audio

sources on the system.

This section provides some examples of VCR and digital

AV equipment connections.

Connecting analog AV components

Connect the DVD controller and external AV equipment

as shown in the illustration.

Connecting digital AV components

Connect the subwoofer/system control and external AV

equipment as shown in the illustration.

When connecting to optical type digital AV

components

When connecting to coaxial type digital

AV components

INPUT

DOCK

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

ANALOG

VCR (for example)

Subwoofer/system control

INPUT

DOCK

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

ANALOG

OPTICAL

DIGITAL OUTPUT

OPTICAL

DIGITAL OUTPUT

Digital audio

component

Subwoofer/system control

Game

console

INPUT

DOCK

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

ANALOG

COAXIAL

DIGITAL OUTPUT

Digital audio

component

OTHER CONNECTIONS

20 En

Connecting optional equipment

The system is equipped with the DOCK terminal, which

allows you to connect the Yamaha iPod universal dock

(such as YDS-10 or YDS-11, sold separately) or Yamaha

Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold

separately). Connect the optional equipment to the DOCK

terminal of the subwoofer/system control using its

dedicated cable.

When connecting the Yamaha iPod

universal dock

When connecting the Yamaha Bluetooth

wireless audio receiver

■ Connecting the power cable

After you have made all connections, connect the power

cable of the subwoofer/system control.

Hint

You can attach or detach the cover according to your

preference after you have made all connections.

Attach the cover to the rear panel of subwoofer/system

control using the 6 supplied screws as shown.

DOCK

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

ANALOG

Yamaha iPod universal dock

(such as YDS-10 or YDS-11, sold separately)

DOCK

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

ANALOG

amaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver

(such as YBA-10, sold separately)

SPEAKERS

MAINS

SPEAKER

IMPEDANCE

MIN.

To AC

outlet

21 En

English

PREPARATION

■ Inserting batteries into the remote

control

1 Press on the battery cover and open the cover.

2 Insert the two supplied batteries (AA, R6, UM-3) into

the battery compartment.

Insert the batteries according to the polarity markings

(+ and –).

3 Close the battery cover.

Replacing the batteries

If the batteries run low, the effective operation distance of the

remote control decreases considerably. If this happens,

replace the batteries with two new ones as soon as possible.

Notes

– Do not use an old battery together with new one.

– Do not use different types of batteries (for

example, alkaline and manganese) together. Each

type of battery has its own characteristics even if

they are similar in shape.

– If the batteries run out, immediately remove them

from the remote control to prevent an explosion or

acid leak.

– Dispose of the batteries according to the regional

regulations.

– If a battery starts leaking, dispose of it

immediately.

Be careful not to let leaking battery acid come into

contact with your skin or clothing. Before inserting

new batteries, wipe the compartment clean.

– Replace the batteries within two minutes to

preserve the preset code in the remote control.

Hint

Remove the transparent sheet before using the remote

control.

■ Using the remote control

Use the remote control within 6 m of the DVD controller

and point it toward the remote control sensor.

Basic operation of the remote control

1 Use the Input selection buttons on the remote control

to select the input source you wish to control (for

example DVD/USB).

→ The selected source appears in the front panel

display.

When the button contains several input sources such

as DVD/USB and INPUT 1-4 buttons, the input

source switches each time you press the button.

2 Operate the desired function (for example, h or b

/ a).

Notes

– Be careful not to spill liquid on the remote control.

– Be careful not to drop the remote control.

– Do not leave the remote control in the following

places:

– hot or humid places, such as near a heater or in a

bathroom

– extremely cold places

– dusty places

– To operate your TV with the remote control, you

need to set the preset code.

Refer to “Setting the preset code” on page 66 for

how to change the preset code.

GETTING STARTED

Press

STANDBY / ON

EJECT

30˚ 30˚

ENTER

STB

Within 6 m

TV VOL

VOLUME

TUNER MUTE

TV INPUT

DVD

USB INPUT 1-4

POSITION

AREA SOUND TEST

DOCK

Input

selection

buttons

GETTING STARTED

22 En

■ Turn on the system

Press STANDBY/ON on the DVD controller or the

remote control.

The LED indicators beside the disc loading slot light up

when the system is turned on.

SLEEP

NIGHT

ENHANCER

STEREO

GAMESPORTS

MUSIC

FUNC.

WP87010DVX-700

TV STB

POWER

STANDBY

10KEY

MOVIE

STANDBY/ON

STANDBY / ON

EJECT

Light up

GETTING STARTED

23 En

PREPARATION

English

■ Setting the video input/output

Notes

– Make sure that you have completed all the

necessary connections (Refer to “Connecting a

TV” on page 17).

– If the settings you have selected are not

appropriate, you can reset DVD settings to the

initial factory settings (Refer to “System menu” on

page 65).

1 Press DVD/USB repeatedly until “DVD” appears in

the front panel display.

2 Turn on the TV and set to the correct video-in

channel.

→ You should see the background screen on the TV.

– Usually this channel is between the lowest and

highest channels and may be called FRONT, A/V

IN or VIDEO. See your TV manual for more

details.

– Or, you may go to channel 1 on your TV, then

press the Channel down button repeatedly until you

see the Video In channel.

– Or, the TV remote control may have a button or

switch that chooses different video modes.

Setting the TV display

Set the aspect ratio of the DVD controller according to the

TV you have connected. The format you select must be

available on the disc. If it is not, the TV display setting

will not affect the picture during playback.

1 Press SETUP on the remote control.

DVD setup menu is displayed on the screen.

2 Press / / / on the remote control to

highlight [Initial Settings], and then press ENTER.

3 Press / on the remote control to highlight

[Video Output], and then press ENTER.

INFO.

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

TOP MENU

SETUP RETURN

CODE SET

PRESET/CH

ENTER

STB

Play Mode

Initial Setting

Disc Navigator

Video Adjust

Initial Setting

Video Output

Language

Display

Options

TV Screen 4:3 (Letter Box)

Component Out

Interlace

HDMI Resolution

720x480p

HDMI Color Component

GETTING STARTED

24 En

4 Press / on the remote control to highlight

[TV Screen], and then press ENTER.

5 Press / on the remote control to highlight one

of the options below, and then press ENTER.

4:3 (Letter Box)

Select this if you have a conventional TV. In this case, a

wide picture with black bar on the upper and lower

portions of the TV screen will be displayed.

4:3 (Pan&Scan)

Select this if you have a conventional TV and want both

sides of the picture to be trimmed or formatted to fit your

TV screen.

Note

If the disc does not support an aspect ratio of 4:3

(Pan&Scan), the content is displayed in 4:3 (Letter

Box).

16:9 (Wide)

Select this if you have a wide-screen TV.

16:9 (Compressed)

Select this if a wide-screen TV is connected to the DVD

controller with an HDMI cable, and set HDMI Resolution

to either [1920 x 1080p], [1920 x 1080i], or [1280 x

720p]. When playing back a content whose aspect ratio is

4:3, black bars cover the sides of the screen.

Selecting the output type for

COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT jacks

To use progressive display function, connect to a TV,

which has that function, via COMPONENT VIDEO

OUTPUT jacks.

1 Press SETUP on the remote control.

2 Press / / / on the remote control to

highlight [Initial Settings], and then press ENTER.

3 Press / on the remote control to highlight

[Video Output], and then press ENTER.

4 Press / on the remote control to highlight

[Component Out], and then press ENTER.

5 Press / on the remote control to highlight

[Progressive] / [Interlace], and then press ENTER.

6 When the confirmation screen appears, press ENTER

again.

To cancel the setting, press RETURN.

Note

Do not select [Progressive] if your TV does not have a

progressive display function.

If your TV is also connected via HDMI OUTPUT

terminal, the system may ignore this setting and

output the progressive signal from COMPONENT

VIDEO OUTPUT jacks.

Initial Setting

Video Output

Language

Display

Options

TV Screen 4:3 (Letter Box)

Component Out

Interlace

HDMI Resolution

720x480p

HDMI Color Component

Initial Setting

Video Output

Language

Display

Options

TV Screen 4:3 (Letter Box)

Component Out

Interlace

HDMI Resolution

720x480p

HDMI Color Component

GETTING STARTED

25 En

PREPARATION

English

■ Setting language preferences

You can select your preferred language settings so that

this controller will automatically switch to your preferred

language whenever you load a disc. If the language

selected is not available on the disc, the disc’s default

setting language will be used instead. The OSD (on-screen

display) language for the DVD setup menu will remain as

you set it, regardless of various disc languages.

On-screen display (OSD) language

1 Press SETUP on the remote control.

DVD setup menu appears on the screen.

2 Press / / / on the remote control to

highlight [Initial Settings], and then press ENTER.

3 Press / on the remote control to highlight

[Display], and then press ENTER.

4 Press / on the remote control to highlight

[OSD Language], and then press ENTER.

5 Press / on the remote control to select a

language, and then press ENTER.

Audio, Subtitle and Disc menu

languages

1 Press SETUP on the remote control.

DVD setup menu appears on the screen.

2 Press / / / on the remote control to

highlight [Initial Settings], and then press ENTER.

3 Press / on the remote control to highlight

[Language], and then press ENTER.

4 Press / on the remote control to highlight the

item below, and then press ENTER.

– Audio Language

– Subtitle Language

– DVD Menu Language

Hint

Refer to page 40 for the other items.

5 Press / on the remote control to select a

language, and then press ENTER.

Initial Setting

Video Output

Language

Display

Options

OSD Language English

Angle Indicator

Initial Setting

Video Output

Language

Display

Options

Audio Language English

Subtitle

anguage

English

DVD Menu Lang. English

Subtitle Display On

26 En

BASIC OPERATIONS

This unit is designed for use with DVD, CD, Video CD,

and Super Video CD, as well as DivX

files and WMV

files recorded on CD-R or DVD-R/DVD+R.

IMPORTANT!

– DVD discs and players are designed with regional

restrictions. Before playing a disc, make sure that

the disc is for the same zone as your DVD

controller.

– Do not insert any objects other than discs into the

disc loading slot. Doing so may cause the DVD

controller to malfunction.

– Depending on the disc, some functions may be

prohibited.

– This unit is not compatible with 8-cm discs.

■ Playing discs

1 Turn on the system.

2 Press DVD/USB repeatedly until “DVD” appears in

the front panel display.

3 Turn on the TV power and set to the correct Video-in

channel (Refer to “Setting the video input/output” on

page 23).

→ You should see the background screen on the TV.

4 Insert the disc into the disc loading slot.

5 Press h to start playback.

→ If a disc menu appears on the TV, refer to “Using

the disc menu (DVD only)” on page 28.

→ If the disc is locked by parental lock function, you

must enter your 4-digit password (Refer to “Parental

Lock” on page 41).

Note

If you do the operation that is not available during

playback, a message “This operation can’t be

performed.” or “Depending on the disc, this operation

may be prohibited.” appears.

Playing DivX

video/WMV files

DivX

video file

This unit can play DivX

videos recorded on CD-R/RW,

DVD-R/-RW, DVD+R/+RW discs. By default they will

be played in alphabetical order. The supported files are

shown below.

– Plays all versions of DivX

video (including

DivX

6) with enhanced playback of DivX

media files and the DivX

media format.

– The following filename extensions are supported

“.avi” and “.divx”.

DISC OPERATION

STANDBY / ON

EJECT

Displaying external subtitle files

The font sets listed below are available for external

subtitle files. You can see the proper font set on-screen

by setting [Subtitle Language] to match the subtitle

file.

– Some external subtitle files may be displayed

incorrectly or not at all.

– For external subtitle files, the following subtitle

format filename extensions are supported:

“.srt”, “.sub”, “.ssa”, “.smi”

– The filename of the movie file has to be

repeated at the beginning of the filename for the

external subtitle file.

– The number of external subtitle files which can

be switched for the same movie file is limited to

a maximum of 10.

Group 1

Albanian (sq), Basque (eu), Catalan (ca),

Danish (da), Dutch (nl), English (en),

Faroese (fo), Finnish (fi), French (fr),

German (de), Icelandic (is), Irish (ga),

Italian (it), Norweigian (no),

Portuguese (pt), Rhaeto-Romanic (rm),

Scottish (gd), Spanish (es), Swedish (sv)

Group 2

Albanian (sq), Croatian (hr), Czech (cs),

Hungarian (hu), Polish (pl),

Romanian (ro), Slovak (sk),

Slovenian (sl)

Group 3

Bulgarian (bg), Byelorussian (be),

Macedonian (mk), Russian (ru),

Serbian (sr), Ukrainian (uk)

Group 4

Hebrew (iw), Yiddish (ji)

Group 5

Turkish (tr)

DISC OPERATION

27 En

BASIC OPERATIONS

English

WMV file

WMV content can be encoded by using Windows Media

Encoder.

The supported files are shown below.

– The DVD controller is compatible with WMV9

files that are encoded by using the Windows Media

Encoder 9 Series, with “.wmv” as an filename

extension.

– Compatible with size under 720 x 576 pixels/720 x

480 pixels.

– The available maximum bit rate is about 2 to

3 Mbps. The maximum bit rate varies depending

on the encode method.

– Advanced Profile is not supported.

– DRM-Protected video files are not played in the

DVD controller.

■ Basic playback controls

To pause playback

During playback, press e.

– To resume normal playback, press h.

To stop playback

Press s.

To select track/chapter

Press b / a to select previous/next track or chapter.

You can enter a track/chapter number using Numeric

keypad 0-9.

To search backward/forward

Press w / f.

– To resume normal playback, press h.

– When searching, press w / f again to increase the

search speed. (DVD, CD, and VideoCD only)

To playback in slow motion

During pause, press and hold f to play back in slow

motion. To resume normal playback, press h.

During pause, press and hold w to play back in reverse

slow motion. (DVD only)

Hint

During slow motion playback, press w / f to

change the playback speed. (DVD, CD, and Video CD

only)

To advance by frame

During pause, press f to advance by frame. To resume

normal mode, press h.

During pause, press w to reverse by frame. (DVD

only)

To adjust the volume level

Press VOLUME +/– on the remote control or VOLUME

u / d on the DVD controller. The volume level appears

in the front panel display.

SLEEP

NIGHT

ENHANCER

AUDIO DELAY

AUDIO

PLAY MODE

TOP MENU

ANGLE

CLEAR

MEMORY

LOCK

SUBTITLE

AUTO

MANUAL

PRESET/CH

SRCH MODE

STEREO

ON SCREEN

ZOOM

ON OFF

BLUETOOTH

DISP. MODE

GAMESPORTS

MUSIC

FUNC.

WP87010DVX-700

TV STB

POWER

STANDBY

10KEY

MOVIE

When using Numeric

keypad 0-9

Switch FUNC./10KEY to

10KEY

Numeric keypad 0-9

DISC OPERATION

28 En

■ Ejecting a disc

Press s to stop disc playback, and then press EJECT on

the DVD controller.

Note

Do not push the ejected disc when reloading it. To

reload the ejected disc, press EJECT, or remove the

disc from the disc loading slot fully, then insert it to

the disc loading slot once again.

■ Using the disc menu (DVD only)

To display the disc menu

Press TOP MENU to display the top-level disc menu.

Press MENU to return to the main menu. The same menu

as the top-level disc menu may appear depending on the

disc.

Hint

– Depending on the disc, a menu may appear on the

TV screen once you load a disc.

– The disc menu is displayed when you press TOP

MENU during playing DivX

files. (If available)

Note

Depending on the disc, these menus do not appear on

the TV screen.

To select a playback feature or item

Press / / / on the remote control, then press

ENTER to start playback.

You can also specify the number to select a feature or

item.

To enter a number, switch FUNC./10KEY to 10KEY.

■ Playback control (PBC) (Video CD

only)

Some Video CD/super Video CD discs are compatibility

with PBC function.

PBC playback allows you to play Video CDs

interactively, following the menu on the display.

To display the PBC menu

When you insert a video CD or super video CD with PBC

function and press h, playback starts with the function.

During playback, press RETURN to display the menu.

Press b / a to display the other menu on the

previous/next page.

To select a track in PBC menu

To select a track, switch FUNC./10KEY to 10KEY, enter

the number, and then press ENTER.

Note

To disable PBC, press s twice, then press a. You

can enter a track number using Numeric keypad 0-

9 instead of pressing a.

To enable PBC again, press s twice, then press h to

play back.

■ Changing soundtrack language

While playing a DVD with multiple language

soundtracks, press AUDIO repeatedly to select the

language.

Notes

– If you cancel the resume mode or eject the disc, the

language gets back to the default setting.

– When playing a Video CD, it switches 1/L (Left)

and 2/R (Right).

– You can change the soundtrack language by

pressing AUDIO during playing DivX

video

files. (if available)

– Depending on the disc, you can change the

soundtrack language only in the disc menu.

STANDBY / ON

EJECT

DISC OPERATION

29 En

BASIC OPERATIONS

English

■ Changing subtitle language

This operation works only on DVDs with multiple subtitle

languages. You can change the language you want while

playing a DVD.

Press SUBTITLE repeatedly to select a language from the

various subtitle languages.

Notes

– If you cancel the resume mode or eject the disc, the

language gets back to the default setting.

– Depending on the disc, you can change the

language only in the disc menu.

– You can change the subtitle language by pressing

SUBTITLE during playing DivX

video files. (if

available)

■ Resuming playback from the last

stopped point

With the exception of VR format DVD-R/-RW discs,

when you stop playback of a DVD, CD, or Video CD/

Super video CD or DivX

video/WMV discs,

“RESUME” appears in the front panel display indicating

that you can resume playback again from that point.

With DVDs and Video CD/Super video CDs, if you eject

the disc in the DVD controller after stopping playback, the

last play position is stored in memory. If the next disc you

load is the same one, “Last Memory” appears and

playback will resume. For DVD-Video discs, the system

stores the play position of the last five discs. When one of

these discs is next loaded, you can resume playback.

Hints

– To clear the resume point, press s again while

“RESUME” is displayed.

– If you don’t need the Last Memory function when

you stop a disc, you can press EJECT to stop

playback and eject the disc.

Notes

– Resume and Last Memory functions may not work

with some discs.

– As for CD and movie files (DivX

/WMV), the

resume point is cleared when the disc is ejected or

the input is changed.

■ Viewing from another angle

If the disc contains sequences recorded from different

camera angles, the angle mark appears on the screen.

Press ANGLE repeatedly to select the desired angle.

Hint

You can hide the angle mark (Page 41).

■ Displaying disc information

Press ON SCREEN to display track, chapter and title

information. Press ON SCREEN repeatedly to select the

information.

■ Zooming in

This function allows you to enlarge the picture double or

quadruple of the original size. While playing a disc, press

ZOOM once to double or twice to quadruple the size. You

can move the zoom point using / / / .

Press ZOOM one more time to return to the original size.

DISC OPERATION

30 En

■ Advanced operation

When playing discs, you can use advanced operations

such as repeat playback and programming playback. Use

the menu to set them.

1 Press PLAY MODE on the remote control.

Play Mode menu appears.

2 Use / to select playback function, then press

ENTER.

Setup for each items. Refer to the description below.

3 Press SETUP to return to the previous screen.

A-B repeat playback

Select [A-B Repeat] in the Play Mode menu, then press

ENTER.

Specify the section according to the following procedure.

Once you specify the section, repeat playback starts.

Notes

– A-B repeat playback is not available for DivX

Video/WMV discs.

– You cannot specify the section that straddles

tracks.

Repeat playback

Select [Repeat] in Play Mode menu, then press ENTER.

Select [Title Repeat]/[Chapter Repeat], then press

ENTER at the point you want to repeat. Repeat playback

starts.

To exit the repeat playback, select [Repeat Off], then press

ENTER.

Available repeat playback

Hint

You can use program playback with repeat playback.

If program playback is active, you can select [Program

Repeat].

Random playback

Select [Random] in Play Mode menu, then press ENTER.

When playing DVD, select [Random Title]/[Random

Chapter], then press ENTER.

When playing CD/Video CD, select [On], then press

ENTER.

To exit the random playback, select [Random Off], then

press ENTER.

[A-B Repeat]

Repeats a specific section between A

and B

[Repeat]

Repeats title/chapter/disc/track

[Random]

Plays titles/chapters/tracks randomly

[Program]

Plays titles/chapters/tracks in the

order you want

[Search Mode]

Plays a specific chapter/track/time

that you want to play

PLAY MODE

INFO.

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

TOP MENU

SETUP RETURN

CODE SET

CLEAR

MEMORY

LOCK

AUTO

MANUAL

PRESET/CH

ENTER

SRCH MODE

Play Mode

A-B Repeat

Repeat

Random

Program

Serch Mode

A (Start Point)

B (End Point)

Off

Starting point:

Select [A (Start)], then press

ENTER at the point you want

to start repeating.

End point:

Select [B (End point)], then

press ENTER at the point you

want to end repeating.

Exiting repeat playback:

Select [OFF], then press

ENTER.

DVD:

[Title Repeat], [Chapter Repeat]

CD/Video CD:

[Disc Repeat], [Track Repeat]

DivX

/WMV:

[Title Repeat], [Chapter Repeat]

(if supported)

DISC OPERATION

31 En

BASIC OPERATIONS

English

Program playback

Select [Program] in the Play Mode menu, then press

ENTER.

When playing a DVD, you can program the order the

titles/chapters are played back. When playing a CD/Video

CD, you can only program the order the tracks are played

back.

Programming the playback order

Select [Create/Edit] and press ENTER to open program

list to set the playback order. Use / / / and

ENTER to program the order. You can store up to 24

steps.

Each time you press ENTER, the step moves to the next.

Use the same procedure to complete the programming.

Hints

– To remove the step, press CLEAR on the step.

– To add a step in the middle of the list, select a title/

chapter/track.

– If you press SETUP after programming, program

playback is canceled. To do the program play back

again, enter [Program] again.

Starting/Stopping program playback

In program mode, press h to start program playback.

Press s to stop the program playback.

During program playback, press b / a to skip to the

next or previous programmed title/chapter/track.

Hint

You can also start/stop program playback by selecting

[Playback Start]/[Playback Stop].

Deleting the program order

Select [Program Delete] in the menu, then press ENTER.

Using search mode

Select [Search Mode] in Play Mode menu, then press

ENTER.

Select the item you want to search, then enter a title/

chapter/track number using Numeric keypad 0-9.

Press ENTER to start playback.

Search mode types

You can select [Time Search] during playback. Enter a 4-

digit number to specify the minutes and seconds. For

example, to specify 32 minutes and 20 seconds, enter

3220. To specify 1 hour, 25 minute, and 40 second, enter

8540.

Program

Program Step

01.

02.

03.

04.

05.

06.

07.

08.

Track 1-14

Track 01

Track 02

Track 03

Track 04

Track 05

Track 06

Track 07

Track 08

Total Time 000.00

DVD:

[Title Search], [Chapter Search], [Time

Search]

CD/Video CD:

[Track Search], [Time Search]

DivX

/WMV:

[Time Search], [Chapter Search]

(if supported)

DISC OPERATION

32 En

■ Disc navigator

When playing DVD or Video CD, you can display a list of

titles and tracks using disc navigator.

1 Press SETUP on the remote control.

DVD setup menu appears.

2 Press / / / to highlight [Disc

Navigator], then press ENTER.

3 Select the item that you want to display in a list, then

press ENTER.

The available items vary depending on the disc that

you are loading.

Hints

– Select [Time] to display an image from every 10

minutes.

– Original means the titles recorded on a DVD

recorder. Playlist means the titles arranged based

on Original.

4 Select a number, then press ENTER to start playback.

6 titles/chapters/tracks will be displayed on the screen.

Press b / a to display the next/previous page.

You can select the number either from the menu or

remote control.

DVD-Video:

[Title], [Chapter]

DVD-R/-R DL/-RW

(VR format):

[Original: Title],

[Original: Time],

[Playlist: Title],

[Playlist: Time]

Video CD:

[Track], [Time]

INFO.

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

TOP MENU

SETUP RETURN

CODE SET

PRESET/CH

ENTER

STB

Play Mode

Initial Setting

Disc Navigator

Video Adjust

04 05 06

33 En

BASIC OPERATIONS

English

This system can play audio files and picture files recorded

on CD-R or DVD-R/DVD+R, etc.

Note

The files and folders may not be recognized if the disc

is in the following condition.

There are 299 or more folders in a disc.

There are 648 or more files or subfolders in a folder.

Compressed audio file

– MPEG1 audio layer3 (MP3)

– Windows Media Audio (WMA)

– MPEG-4 AAC

Hints

– The available sampling frequency is 32/44.1/48

kHz.

– The recommended bit rate for MP3/WMA is

128 kbps or higher.

– The supported bit rate for MPEG-4 AAC is

between 16 and 320 kbps.

– The following filename extensions are supported.

“.mp3” or “.MP3” (for MP3 files), “.wma” or

“.WMA” (for WMA files), “.m4a” (for MPEG-4

AAC)

Notes

– Files that are encoded in VBR (Variable Bit Rate)

cannot be played.

– Files that are encoded in loss-less format cannot be

played.

– DRM copy-protected files cannot be played.

– Encode the WMA files with an application that is

certified by Microsoft Corporation. If not, the files

may not play back correctly.

– MPEG-4 AAC files encoded with iTunes are

supported. Those files may not play back correctly

depending on the version of iTunes.

Still image file

–JPEG

– FUJICOLOR CD

– KODAK Picture CD

Hints

– This unit is compatible with JPEG images that are

3072 x 2048 pixels or less.

– This unit supports the files that are compliant with

Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format)

version 2.2.

– The image file must have the file name extension

“.jpg” or “.JPG”.

Note

This unit does not support progressive JPEG images.

■ To play back audio files

The audio files recorded on the disc are played back.

1 Insert the disc that contains audio files.

2 Press h, and playback starts.

During the playback, you can use the following

operations.

3 Press s to stop.

PLAYING OTHER DISCS

e Pauses the slide show. When

playing a disc with audio files, it

pauses the music.

b / a Plays the previous/next track.

ON SCREEN Displays the track information on

the TV display.

AUDIO DELAY

AUDIO

PLAY MODE

TOP MENU

ANGLE

CLEAR

MEMORY

LOCK

SUBTITLE

AUTO

MANUAL

PRESET/CH

SRCH MODE

ON SCREEN

ZOOM

ON OFF

BLUETOOTH

DISP. MODE

PLAYING OTHER DISCS

34 En

■ To start a slide show of JPEG

files

JPEG files recorded on the disc are played back in order in

slide show.

During the slide show, you can play back all JPEG files in

the disc in order.

Hints

– If the disc contains several folders, the pictures in

each folders are displayed in alphabetical order.

– If the disc contains both JPEG files and

compressible audio files, you can enjoy the music

during the slide show.

1 Insert a the disc that contains JPEG files.

2 Press h.

The slide show starts. During the slide show, you can

do the following operations.

3 Press s to stop the slide show.

■ Selecting a file to play back

You can select a file that you want to play back using Disc

Navigator.

1 Press SETUP after inserting the disc you want to play

back.

The DVD setup menu appears on the screen.

2 Select [Disc Navigator], then press ENTER.

Disc Navigator is opens.

3 Press / to select the file you want to play

back.

If you select a JPEG file, the preview image appears in

the right window.

To move to the one lower folder

Select the folder, then press or ENTER.

To move to the one upper folder

Press . You can also move by selecting the [. .] folder.

4 Press ENTER to play back the selected file/folder.

When playing audio/movie files

Playback starts from the selected file and plays the files in

the folder.

When playing JPEG files

The slide show starts from the selected file and plays the

files in the folder.

Hint

When the disc contains both audio files and JPEG

files, play back an audio file first, then play back the

pictures to enjoy the music during the slide show.

In this case, e and b / a is used for JPEG files.

5 Press s to stop playback.

e Pauses the slide show. When

playing a disc with audio files, it

pauses the music.

b / a Move to the previous/next

picture. When playing a disc

with audio files, it plays the

previous/next song.

/ / / Pauses the slide show to rotate or

flip the picture. Press h to

restart the slide show.

ZOOM Pauses the slide show to enlarge

the picture. Each time you press

the key, the picture size doubles,

quadruples, and then returns to

normal. Press h to restart the

slide show.

MENU Displays Disc Navigator.

AUDIO DELAY

AUDIO

PLAY MODE

INFO.

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

TOP MENU

SETUP RETURN

CODE SET

ANGLE

CLEAR

MEMORY

LOCK

SUBTITLE

AUTO

MANUAL

PRESET/CH

ENTER

SRCH MODE

ON SCREEN

ZOOM

ON OFF

BLUETOOTH

DISP. MODE

folder_1

folder_2

folder_3

folder_4

folder_5

folder_6

00:00 00:00 0kbps

PLAYING OTHER DISCS

35 En

BASIC OPERATIONS

English

■ Using a USB device

You can play back audio files, and picture files saved on

your USB devices.

Supported USB devices

The DVD controller supports USB mass storage class

devices (e.g., flash memories, card readers, portable audio

players) using FAT16 or FAT32 format.

Notes

– Some devices may not work properly even if they

meet the requirements.

– If “USB ERROR” or “NO USB” appears in the

front panel display, see the following methods.

– Set the system to the standby mode, and then

turn it on again.

– Disconnect the device when the DVD controller

is in the standby mode, then connect it again and

turn on the DVD controller.

– Set the input source to USB, then remove and

insert the USB device.

– Select the input source other than USB, then Set

it back to USB again.

– Connect the AC adapter if the adapter is supplied

with the device.

– If the electrical power consumption of the USB

device is high, the USB device may not be used

correctly.

– Do not connect devices other than USB mass

storage class devices: USB chargers, USB hubs,

PCs, etc.

Playing data files

Yamaha and suppliers accepts no liability for the loss of

data saved on the USB devices connected to the DVD

controller. As a precaution, it is recommended that the

files are tested after they have been saved on.

1 Press DVD/USB repeatedly until “USB” appears in

the front panel display.

2 Connect your USB device to the USB terminal of the

DVD controller.

3 Start playback in either of the following ways.

When playing back all files in a USB device

Press h to start playback.

When playing back the selected files

Press MENU to open Disc Navigator.

Press / / / to select files, then press h.

Refer to page 34 for how to select files.

4 Press s to stop playback. Before you remove the

USB device, select an input source other than USB.

Note

When the input source is USB, you cannot open the

DVD setup menu.

USB

INPUT

USB

device

36 En

DVD SETUP MENU

■ Menu overview

[Video Adjust] menu

Adjusts the picture quality. The bold items/parameters listed below are the default settings.

[Initial Settings] menu

Make advanced settings. The bold items/parameters listed below are the default settings.

* Depending on the disc, NTSC and PAL switches automatically. For U.S.A. and Canada models, only NTSC is available.

Notes

– Refer to page 30 for [Play Mode]

– Refer to page 32 for [Disc Navigator]

DVD SETUP MENU OPTIONS

Menu Item Setting item/Parameter

Sharpness Fine, Standard, Soft

Brightness –20 – 0 – +20

Contrast –16 – 0 – +16

Gamma High, Medium, Low, Off

Hue green 9 – 0 – red 9

Chroma Level –9 – 0 – +9

Menu Item Setting Item Parameter Page

Video Output

TV Screen

4:3 (Letter Box), 4:3 (Pan&Scan), 16:9 (Wide),

16:9 (Compressed)

Component Out Progressive, Interlace 38

HDMI Resolution

1920x1080p, 1920x1080i, 1280x720p,

720x480p*/720x576p*, 720x480i*/720x576i*

HDMI Color Full range RGB, RGB, Component 39

Language

Audio Language

English, French, German, Italian, Spanish, Other

Language

Subtitle Language

English, French, German, Italian, Spanish, Other

Language

DVD Menu Lang.

W/ Subtitle Lang., English, French, German,

Italian, Spanish, Other Language

Subtitle Display On, Off 40

Display

OSD Language English, Français, Deutsch, Italiano, Español 41

Angle Indicator On, Off 41

Options

Parental Lock Password, Level Change, Country Code 41

DivX(R) VOD Display 42

37 En

DVD SETUP MENU

English

This setup is carried out via the TV,

enabling you to customize the DVD

controller to suit your particular

requirements

1 Press DVD/USB repeatedly to switch the input source

to DVD.

2 Press SETUP on the remote control.

DVD setup menu appears.

3 Press / / / to highlight [Video Adjust],

then press ENTER.

4 Select the item that you want to adjust, press ENTER,

and then press / / / to adjust the image

quality.

You can adjust the following items in Video Adjust

menu.

[Sharpness]

Select this to adjust the sharpness. Choose from Fine/

Standard/Soft.

[Brightness]

Increase or decrease the value to adjust the brightness.

You can adjust the value from -20 to +20 using / .

[Contrast]

Increase or decrease the value to adjust the sharpness. You

can adjust the value from -16 to +16 using / .

[Gamma]

Select this to adjust the darkness. Choose from High/

Medium/Low/Off.

[Hue]

Select this to adjust the balance of green and red. You can

adjust the value from Green 9 to Red 9 using / .

[Chroma Level]

Select this to adjust the color density. You can adjust the

value from –9 to +9 using / .

5 Press ENTER to confirm.

Repeat steps 3 and 4 if necessary.

6 Press SETUP to close the menu.

Hints

– Once you confirm the values, you can select other

items in Video Adjust menu.

– If the settings you have selected are not

appropriate, you can reset DVD settings to the

initial factory settings (Page 65).

Note

]

The sharpness setting does not affect the HDMI

signal.

VIDEO ADJUST MENU

INFO.

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

TOP MENU

SETUP RETURN

CODE SET

PRESET/CH

ENTER

STB

TUNER MUTE

TV INPUT

DVD

USB INPUT 1-4

POSITION

AREA SOUND TEST

DOCK

Play Mode

Initial Setting

Disc Navigator

Video Adjust

Sharpness

Brightness

Contrast

Gamma

Hue

Chroma Level

Fine

Standard

Soft

Video Adjust

38 En

This setup is carried out via the TV,

enabling you to customize the DVD

controller to suit your particular

requirements

1 Press DVD/USB repeatedly to switch the input source

to DVD.

2 Press SETUP on the remote control.

DVD setup menu appears.

3 Press / / / to highlight [Initial Settings],

then press ENTER.

4 Press / to highlight the item that you want to

adjust, then press ENTER.

Refer to the following explanations.

5 Press ENTER to confirm.

Repeat steps 3 and 4 if necessary.

6 Press SETUP to close the menu.

Hint

If the settings you have selected are not appropriate,

you can reset DVD settings to the initial factory

settings (Page 65).

■ Video Output

Configure the video output settings.

TV Screen

Set the aspect ratio according to the TV you have

connected.

[4:3 (Letter Box)] (default)

Select this if you have a conventional TV. In this case, a

wide picture with black bands on the upper and lower

portions of the TV screen will be displayed.

[4:3 (Pan&Scan)]

Select this if you have a conventional TV and want both

sides of the picture to be trimmed or formatted to fit your

TV screen.

Note

If the disc does not support an aspect ratio of 4:3

(Pan&Scan), the content is displayed in 4:3 (Letter

Box).

[16:9 (Wide)]

Select this if you have a wide-screen TV.

[16:9 (Compressed)]

Select this if a wide-screen TV is connected to the DVD

controller with an HDMI cable, and set HDMI Resolution

to either [1920 x 1080p], [1920 x 1080i], or [1280 x

720p]. When playing back a content whose aspect ratio is

4:3, black bars cover the sides of the screen.

Component Out

Select the video type output via the COMPONENT

VIDEO OUTPUT jacks.

[Progressive]

Select this if the connected TV has progressive display

function. When you select this and press ENTER, the

confirmation screen appears.

Press ENTER again to confirm the setting. If you want to

cancel the setting, press RETURN.

INITIAL SETTINGS MENU

SLEEP

NIGHT

ENHANCER

AUDIO DELAY

AUDIO ANGLE

SUBTITLE

STEREO

ON SCREEN

ZOOM

ON OFF

BLUETOOTH

DISP. MODE

GAMESPORTS

MUSIC

FUNC.

WP87010DVX-700

TV STB

POWER

STANDBY

10KEY

MOVIE

INFO.

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

TOP MENU

SETUP RETURN

CODE SET

PRESET/CH

ENTER

STB

TUNER MUTE

TV INPUT

DVD

USB INPUT 1-4

POSITION

AREA SOUND TEST

DOCK

When using Numeric

keypad 0-9

Switch FUNC./10KEY to

10KEY

Numeric keypad 0-9

Initial Setting

Video Output

Language

Display

Options

TV Screen 4:3 (Letter Box)

Component Out

Interlace

HDMI Resolution

720x480p

HDMI Color Component

INITIAL SETTINGS MENU

39 En

DVD SETUP MENU

English

[Interlace] (default)

Select this if the connected TV does not have progressive

display function.

Notes

– Do not select [Progressive] if the connected TV

does not have progressive display function.

– If your TV is also connected via HDMI OUTPUT

terminal, the progressive signal may be output

from the COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT jacks.

HDMI Resolution

Set the resolution output via the HDMI OUTPUT

terminal. Select the resolution and press ENTER, and a

message appears on the screen. Select [YES] to confirm.

The available values are shown below.

[1920 x 1080p]

Select this if the connected TV is designed for progressive

1920 x 1080 resolution.

1080p/60Hz (NTSC)

1080p/50Hz (PAL)

[1920 x 1080i]

Select this if the connected TV is designed for interlaced

1920 x 1080 resolution.

1080i/60Hz (NTSC)

1080i/50Hz (PAL)

[1280 x 720p]

Select this if the connected TV is designed for progressive

1280 x 720 resolution.

720p/60Hz (NTSC)

720p/50Hz (PAL)

[720 x 480p] / [720 x 576p] (default)

Select this if the connected TV is designed for progressive

720 x 480 (NTSC color system)/720 x 576 (PAL color

system) resolution.

480p/60Hz (NTSC)

576p/50Hz (PAL)

[720 x 480i] / [720 x 576i]

Select this if the connected TV is designed for interlaced

720 x 480 (NTSC color system)/720 x 576 (PAL color

system) resolution.

480i/60Hz (NTSC)

576i/50Hz (PAL)

Notes

– Depending on the disc, NTSC and PAL switches

automatically. For U.S.A. and Canada models,

only NTSC is available.

– When you change the resolution, the screen may be

distorted or take some time to be displayed.

– If the screen is not displayed correctly, reset HDMI

resolution to the initial setting (Page 65).

HDMI Color

Set the color output for the HDMI component.

[RGB Full Range]

Reproduces bright white and deep black colors. Select this

if the image reproducibility is poor.

[RGB]

Select this to lower the intensity of the picture when you

selected RGB Full Range.

[Component]

Select this to set the standard component video output

format of the HDMI component.

Note

The default setting varies depending on your HDMI

component.

INITIAL SETTINGS MENU

40 En

■ Language

These menus contain various language options for the

audio, subtitle and disc menus recorded on the DVD. For

details, Refer to “DISC OPERATION” on page 26.

Notes

– Depending on the disc, the language set on the

DVD controller may not play.

– If the disc does not contain the language that you

set on the DVD controller, it may play in another in

language.

Audio Language

Selects an audio language.

[English] (default), [French], [German],

[Italian], [Spanish]

The selected language is used as a default audio setting.

[Other Language]

Selects an audio language from 136 languages. Once you

select this item and press ENTER, you can select a

language in “List of Languages” or “Code.” Refer to

“LIST OF LANGUAGE CODES” on the appendix for the

corresponding codes.

Subtitle Language

Select the subtitle language.

[English] (default), [French], [German],

[Italian], [Spanish]

The selected language is used as a default subtitle setting.

[Other Language]

Selects a subtitle language from 136 languages. Once you

select this item and press ENTER, you can select a

language in “List of Languages” or “Code.” Refer to

“LIST OF LANGUAGE CODES” on the appendix for the

corresponding codes.

DVD Menu Lang.

Selects an displaying language for the DVD menu.

[W/ Subtitle Lang.] (default)

Displays the menu in the language selected in [Subtitle

Language].

[English], [French], [German], [Italian],

[Spanish]

Displays the menus in the selected language.

[Other Language]

Selects an audio language from 136 languages. Once you

select this item and press ENTER, you can select a

language in “List of Languages” or “Code.” Refer to

“LIST OF LANGUAGE CODES” on the appendix for the

corresponding codes.

Subtitle Display

Switch the subtitles On/Off.

[On]

The subtitles are displayed.

[Off]

The subtitles are not displayed.

Initial Setting

Video Output

Language

Display

Options

Audio Language English

Subtitle

anguage

English

DVD Menu Lang. English

Subtitle Display On

INITIAL SETTINGS MENU

41 En

DVD SETUP MENU

English

■ Display

Set the screen display for the DVD controller.

OSD Language

Selects a language for the DVD setup menu.

[English] (default), [Français], [Deutsch],

[Italiano], [Español]

Displays the DVD setup menu in the selected language.

Angle Indicator

Switches the angle mark on/off. If the disc contains

sequences recorded from different camera angles, the

angle mark appears on the screen. Press ANGLE

repeatedly to select the desired angle.

[On]

The angle mark is displayed when the disc contains multi-

angles.

[Off]

The angle mark is not displayed even if the disc contains

multi-angles.

■ Options

You can set other items such as parental lock.

Parental Lock

Some DVDs may have a parental lock level assigned to

the complete disc or to certain scenes on the disc. This

feature lets you set a playback limitation level. The rating

levels are from 1 to 8 and are country dependent. You can

prohibit the playback of certain discs that are not suitable

for your children, or play alternative scenes for certain

discs.

[Password]

Set a password to use for the parental lock function. You

need to enter the password to cancel the parental lock.

1 To set a password, select [Password] and press

ENTER.

2 Use Numeric keypad 0-9 on the remote control to

enter a 4-digit number, then press ENTER to confirm.

Hint

When you play a DVD that is restricted by a parental

lock, a screen requiring a password to be input

appears. Use Numeric keypad 0-9 to enter the

password.

Notes

– Keep the password secure.

– If you forget the password, resets the DVD settings

to the factory defaults, and set it again. For details,

refer to “System menu” on page 65.

Initial Setting

Video Output

Language

Display

Options

OSD Language English

Angle Indicator

Initial Setting

Video Output

Language

Display

Options

Parental Lock Off

DivX(R) VOD

INITIAL SETTINGS MENU

42 En

[Password Change]

Once you set a password, the item name changes to

[Password Change]. If you select [Password Change], you

can change the password.

1 Select [Password Change] to change the password,

then press ENTER.

2 Use Numeric keypad 0-9 on the remote control to

enter the password that you have set before, then press

ENTER.

3 Enter a new password using Numeric keypad 0-9,

then press ENTER.

[Level Change]

You can change the parental lock level.

1 Select [Level Change], then press ENTER.

2 Use Numeric keypad 0-9 on the remote control to

enter a password, then press ENTER to confirm.

3 Press / to change the parental lock level, then

press ENTER.

[Country Code]

You can change the country code. Refer to appendix at the

end of this manual.

1 Select [Country Code], then press ENTER.

2 Use Numeric keypad 0-9 on the remote control to

enter a password, then press ENTER to confirm.

3 Press / to change the parental level, then

press ENTER. You can enter country code using

Numeric keypad 0-9.

Note

When you change the country code, eject the disc

once. Reinsert the disc to apply the settings.

DivX(R) VOD

Yamaha provides you with the DivX

VOD (Video On

Demand) registration code that allows you to rent and

purchase videos using the DivX

VOD service. For more

information, go to www.divx.com/vod

Notes

– If you try to play files without an authorized

registration code, a message “Authorization Error”

appears and the file does not start.

– If a file has a play time limit, the number of

remaining plays is displayed on the screen.

You may need to show the registration code of this unit to

the delivery site. You can check the registration code as

shown below.

1 Select [DivX(R) VOD], then press .

2 Select [Display], then press ENTER.

The registration code is displayed.

Initial Setting

Video Output

Language

Display

Options

DivX(R)Video On Demand

Your registration code is : XXXX

To learn more visit www.divx.com/vod

Done

Registration code

43 En

English

OTHER FUNCTIONS

■

What is AIR SURROUND XTREME?

Ordinarily, two speakers, a center speaker, two surround

speakers, and a subwoofer are necessary for enjoying 5.1

channel surround sound.

Virtual 7.1 channel

The AIR SURROUND XTREME technology, using only

the left and right speakers of the this system and

subwoofer, enables you to enjoy a realistic 7.1 channel

sound by simulating sound from virtual speakers at center,

surround, and surround backs.

C: Center virtual speaker

FR, FL: Front speaker

SW: Subwoofer

SR, SL: Surround virtual speaker

SBR, SBL: Surround back virtual speaker

You can check the virtual surround effect and adjust the

volume balance according to your preference and the

characteristics of your listening room. Refer to the

following pages for details.

– Checking the virtual surround effect. (Page 45)

– Adjusting the volume balance. (Page 64)

■ Listening to surround mode of

AIR SURROUND XTREME

Press one of the surround mode buttons.

The names of the selected input source and the selected

surround mode appear in the front panel display.

Surround mode descriptions

MOVIE

This mode is useful when you listen to a movie soundtrack

on media such as DVDs, etc.

MUSIC

This mode is useful when you listen to music on media

such as DVDs, etc.

SPORTS

This mode is useful when you enjoy sports or TV news

programs.

GAME

This mode is useful when you play video games.

Hints

– To reproduce the original sounds, press STEREO.

– The system automatically memorizes the settings

assigned to each input source. When you select

another input, the system automatically recalls the

last settings for the selected input.

AIR SURROUND XTREME

Typical 5.1 channel speaker system

Front speakers

Subwoofer

Center speaker

Surround speakers

The sound image of the system

SLEEP

NIGHT

ENHANCER

AUDIO DELAY

STEREO

ON SCREEN

ZOOM

DISP. MODE

GAMESPORTS

MUSIC

FUNC.

WP87010DVX-700

TV STB

POWER

STANDBY

10KEY

MOVIE

Switch FUNC./10KEY

to FUNC.

Surround mode

buttons

MOVIE

AIR SURROUND XTREME

44 En

■ Shifting the optimum listening

area from side to side

This function shifts the optimum listening area from side

to side according to your listening position for the best

Virtual Surround effect.

1 Press POSITION to enter position mode.

The current position appears in the front panel display.

2 Press / to shift the optimum listening area (L6,

L5, L4, L3, L2, L1, CENTER, R1, R2, R3, R4, R5,

R6).

Adjust the optimum listening area from L1 to L6 when

your listening position is to the left side of the center

position, and adjust the optimum listening area from

R1 to R6 when your listening position is to the right

side of the center position.

The position appears in the front panel display.

3 Press POSITION again or ENTER to exit position

mode.

Hints

– The default setting is CENTER.

– If you press TEST after performing step 1, the

system outputs the test tone for a virtual center

speaker so that you can adjust the position setting.

(Page 45)

– The setting is set for all the input sources.

– This function is available even when surround

mode is off.

Note

If you do not operate this function within 30 seconds

after entering position mode, the system automatically

exits position mode.

■ Selecting the optimum distance

between the speakers

The surround effect will be changed depending on the

speaker positions. You can set the optimum distance area

to enjoy the best surround effect at your listening position.

1 Press AREA when the surround mode is activated.

The mode switches to the area setting mode. The

current setting appears in the front panel display.

2 Use / to select one of the following area.

Hints

– The default setting is NORMAL.

– When you select WIDE, slightly turn the speakers

toward the listening position to get the better

surround effect.

3 Press AREA or ENTER to apply the setting.

The optimum listening area

INFO.

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

TOP MENU

SETUP RETURN

CODE SET

PRESET/CH

ENTER

STB

DVD

USB INPUT 1-4

POSITION

AREA SOUND TEST

DOCK

POSITION R3

NARROW: Select this when the distance between

the speakers is about 80 cm.

NORMAL: Select this when the distance between

the speakers is about 120 cm.

WIDE: Select this when the distance between

the speakers is about 200 cm.

80cm (32")

120cm (48")

200cm

NARROW

NORMAL

WIDE

32"

42"

Over 42"

INFO.

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

TOP MENU

SETUP RETURN

CODE SET

PRESET/CH

ENTER

STB

DVD

USB INPUT 1-4

POSITION

AREA SOUND TEST

DOCK

AREA NORMAL

AIR SURROUND XTREME

45 En

OTHER FUNCTIONS

English

Hint

This function is available when the surround mode or

extended stereo mode is on. If you do not operate this

function within 30 seconds after entering area setting

mode, the setting automatically exits area setting

mode.

■ Checking the virtual surround

effect

You can check the virtual surround effect using test

tones produced from the speakers.

1 Press TEST to output the test tone.

2 The system outputs the test tone and the output

channel of the test tone appears in the front panel

display.

The output channel of the test tone cycles through as

follows. Each channel outputs the test tone for about

2 seconds.

3 To cancel test tone mode, press TEST again.

Note

The surround back virtual speaker is included in SL

and SR.

■ Using extended stereo mode

An extended sound is achieved for a 2 channel source

such as a CD player.

Press STEREO to activate extended stereo mode.

“EXTENDED” appears in the front panel display.

Each time you press STEREO, the function is turned on

(EXTENDED) and off (STEREO) alternately.

Hints

– The default setting is STEREO.

– The system memorizes the settings assigned to

each input source.

– You can also turn on compressed music enhancer

mode when extended stereo mode is turned on.

Note

This operation is only available when the surround

mode is not activated.

■ Setting compressed music

enhancer

This function enhances your listening experience by

regenerating the missing harmonics in a compression

artifact. This is useful when you play back compressed

music data stored on an iPod or a digital music player.

Press ENHANCER.

The ENHANCER indicator lights up in the front panel

display when this function is turned on.

Each time you press ENHANCER, the function is turned

on and off alternately. The selected mode is stored in

memory even when the system is in the standby mode.

Hints

– The default setting is OFF.

– The system memorizes the settings assigned to

each input source.

– When this function is on, night listening mode is

automatically set to off.

DVD

USB INPUT 1-4

POSITION

AREA SOUND TEST

DOCK

TEST:L

Active (virtual) speaker channel

LCR

SW SL SR

SLEEP

NIGHT

ENHANCER

AUDIO DELAY

STEREO

ON SCREEN

ZOOM

DISP. MODE

GAMESPORTS

MUSIC

FUNC

10KEY

MOVIE

EXTENDED

SLEEP

NIGHT

ENHANCER

AUDIO DELAY

STEREO

ON SCREEN

ZOOM

DISP. MODE

GAMESPORTS

MUSIC

MOVIE

46 En

Make sure that the FM antenna is

connected to the subwoofer/system

control when using the tuner

You can use two tuning modes to tune into the desired FM

station:

Frequency tuning mode

You can search or specify the frequency of the desired FM

station automatically or manually.

Preset tuning mode

You can preset the desired FM stations in advance, and

then recall the station by specifying the preset group and

number.

■ Basic tuning operation

1 Press TUNER repeatedly to set the input source to

FM.

“FM” appears in the front panel display.

2 Press AUTO/MANUAL to switch automatic tuning

mode.

The AUTO indicator lights up when the system is set to

automatic tuning mode.

3 Press PRESET/CH / once to begin

automatic tuning.

When the system is tuned to a station, the TUNED

indicator lights up and the frequency of the received

station is shown in the front panel display.

Hint

When you tune in an FM station using automatic

tuning mode, the system receives the FM radio signal

in stereo reception mode. The STEREO indicator

appears in the front panel display.

LISTENING TO FM BROADCASTS

SLEEP

NIGHT

ENHANCER

AUDIO DELAY

AUDIO ANGLE

SUBTITLE

STEREO

ON SCREEN

ZOOM

ON OFF

BLUETOOTH

DISP. MODE

GAMESPORTS

MUSIC

FUNC.

WP87010DVX-700

TV STB

POWER

STANDBY

10KEY

MOVIE

PTY

SEEK

INFO.

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

TOP MENU

SETUP RETURN

CODE SET

FREQ

TEXT

MEMORY

START

LOCK

AUTO

MANUAL

PRESET/CH

ENTER

STB

SRCH MODE

TV VOL

VOLUME

TUNER MUTE

TV INPUT

DVD

USB INPUT 1-4

DOCK

When using Numeric

keypad 0-9

Switch FUNC./10KEY to

10KEY

Numeric keypad 0-9

Manual tuning

If the signal received from the station you want to

select is weak, you can tune into the desired station by

specifying the frequency manually. In FM tuning

mode, press AUTO/MANUAL repeatedly so that the

AUTO indicator disappears, and then press PRESET/

CH / repeatedly to specify the frequency of

the desired station.

If you tune into a station using the manual tuning

feature, the system receives the FM radio signals in

monaural reception mode to increase signal quality.

A FM 88.9 MHz

Lights up

A FM 89.1 MHz

Lights up

LISTENING TO FM BROADCASTS

47 En

OTHER FUNCTIONS

English

■ Using station preset feature

You can store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset

numbers in each of the 5 preset groups).

Automatic station preset

Available radio stations are automatically tuned in. You

can set all available stations to a preset group at the same

time by using automatic preset.

Note

Only radio stations with sufficient signal strength are

set by automatic preset. If a radio station’s signal is

weak, set it by using manual preset tuning.

1 Press TUNER repeatedly to set the input source to

FM.

“FM” appears in the front panel display.

2 Press and hold MEMORY for more than 3 seconds.

The preset group and number as well as the

MEMORY and AUTO indicators flash. After

approximately 5 seconds, automatic presetting starts

from the current frequency and proceeds through

higher frequencies.

Press MEMORY again to cancel while the MEMORY

indicator is flashing.

Hint

Press A-E/CAT. / to select a preset group, and

then press PRESET/CH / . repeatedly to

select a preset number to which the first station will be

stored after you perform step 2.

Direct frequency tuning

Use this feature to tune into the desired station directly

by entering the frequency.

1 Press TUNER to set the input source to FM.

2 Press AUTO/MANUAL to select automatic tuning

mode or manual tuning mode.

3 Use Numeric keypad 0-9 to specify a radio

frequency.

For example, enter 1037 using Numeric keypad

0-9 to specify 103.7 MHz.

Hint

If the entered frequency is out of the range of the

FM tuning, “WRONG STATION!” appears in the

front panel display and then this unit automatically

tunes into the last selected station.

INFO.

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

TOP MENU

SETUP RETURN

CODE SET

MEMORY

AUTO

MANUAL

PRESET/CH

ENTER

STB

SRCH MODE

TV VOL

VOLUME

TUNER MUTE

TV INPUT

DVD

USB INPUT 1-4

DOCK

A1:FM 88.9 MHz

Flashes

LISTENING TO FM BROADCASTS

48 En

Notes

– Any stored station data existing under a preset

number is cleared when you store a new station

under the same preset number.

– If the number of received stations does not reach

40 (A1 to E8), automatic preset tuning

automatically stops after searching for all the

available stations.

Manual station preset

Use this feature to store the radio stations manually.

1 Tune into a station.

Refer to “Basic tuning operation” on page 46 for the details.

2 Press MEMORY.

The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel

display for approximately 30 seconds.

Press MEMORY again to cancel while the MEMORY

indicator is flashing.

3 Press A-E/CAT. / repeatedly to select a preset

group (A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is

flashing.

The selected preset group appears.

4 Press PRESET/CH / to select a preset

number (1 to 8) while the MEMORY indicator is

flashing.

5 Press MEMORY to confirm the preset.

After “A1:PRESET OK” appears in the front panel

display, the frequency appears with the preset group

and number you selected. The MEMORY indicator

disappears from the front panel display.

If the desired station is not stored, or a station is not

stored to the desired preset group and number, preset

the station manually. Refer to Manual station preset for

details.

A :FM 88.9 MHz

Flashes

A :FM 88.9 MHz

Flashes

Preset group

A1:FM 88.9 MHz

Flashes

Preset number

A1:PRESET OK

A1:FM 88.9 MHz

The displayed station has been stored as A1.

LISTENING TO FM BROADCASTS

49 En

OTHER FUNCTIONS

English

Notes

– Any stored station data existing under a preset

number is cleared when you store a new station

under the same preset number.

– The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored

along with the station frequency.

■ Recalling the preset stations

If you have stored the preset stations based on “Presetting

radio stations”, you can recall them using the following

procedures.

1 Press TUNER on the remote control.

“FM” appears in the front panel display.

2 Press PRESET/CH to select preset tuning mode.

Hint

If a colon(:) appears, the system is set to preset tuning

mode.

3 Use A-E/CAT. / to select the preset group (A to

E).

4 Use PRESET/CH / to select the preset

number you want (1 to 8).

Hint

You can specify the preset number using Numeric

keypad 0-9 by switching FUNC./10KEY to 10KEY.

A1:FM 88.9 MHz

Preset FM station

Preset group and number

50 En

XM Satellite Radio offers an extraordinary variety of

commercial-free music, plus the best in sports, news, talk

and entertainment. XM is broadcast in superior digital

audio from coast to coast. From rock to reggae, from

classical to hip hop, XM has something for every music

fan.

■ Connecting XM Mini-Tuner Home

Dock

Connect XM Mini-Tuner and XM Mini-Tuner Home

Dock (sold separately) to the XM terminal on the rear

panel of subwoofer/system control. For details, see the

operating instructions provided with the XM Mini-Tuner

Home Dock.

Hint

To ensure optimal reception of the XM Satellite Radio

signals, the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock must be

placed at or near a southerly facing window with no

obstacles in the path to the sky. You can mount it

indoors or outdoors. Use the “ANTENNA INFO”

information in the front panel display to check the

antenna reception level and adjust the orientation of

the antenna.

Notes

– If “CHECK ANTENNA” or “CHECK XM

TUNER” appears in the front panel display, the

connection and setting of the antenna, XM Mini-

Tuner Home Dock, or XM Mini-Tuner may not be

correct.

– If “UPGRADE” and “XM TUNER” appear in

sequence in the front panel display, the connected

XM Mini-Tuner is incompatible with this unit.

■ Activating XM Satellite Radio

Once you have installed the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock,

inserted the XM Mini-Tuner, connected the XM Mini-

Tuner Home Dock to your XM Ready

home audio

system, and installed the antenna, you are ready to

subscribe and begin receiving XM programming. There

are three places to find your eight characters XM Radio

ID: On the XM Mini-Tuner, on the XM Mini-Tuner

package, and on XM Channel 0. Record the XM Radio ID

in the following eight squares for reference.

Note

The XM Radio ID does not use the letters “I”, “O”,

“S” or “F”. Activate your XM Satellite Radio service

in the U.S. online at http://activate.xmradio.com/ or

call 1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800- 967-2346). Activate

your XM Satellite Radio service in Canada online at

https://activate.xmradio.ca/ or call 1-877-GET-XMSR

(1-877-438-9677). You will need a major credit card.

XM will send a signal from the satellites to activate

the full channel lineup. Activation normally takes 10

to 15 minutes, but during peak busy periods you may

need to keep your XM Ready home audio system on

for up to an hour. When you can access the full lineup

on your XM Ready home audio system you are done.

LISTENING TO XM

SATELLITE RADIO BROADCASTS

XM Satellite Radio online information

For U.S. customers: http://www.xmradio.com/

For Canadian customers: http://www.xmradio.ca/

XM READY legal disclaimer

XM monthly service subscription sold separately. XM

Mini-Tuner and Home Dock required (each sold

separately) to receive XM service. It is prohibited to

copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack,

manipulate or otherwise make available any

technology or software incorporated in receivers

compatible with the XM Satellite Radio System.

Installation costs and other fees and taxes, including a

one-time activation fee may apply. All fees and

programming subject to change. Channels with

frequent explicit language are indicated with an XL.

Channel blocking is available for XM radio receivers

by calling 1-800-XMRADIO (U.S. residents) and 1-

877-GETXMSR (Canadian residents). XM service

only available in the 48 contiguous United States and

reserved.

SIRIUS

XM Mini-Tuner and XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock

(sold separately)

LISTENING TO XM

SATELLITE RADIO BROADCASTS

51 En

OTHER FUNCTIONS

English

■ Basic XM Satellite Radio

operations

1 Press TUNER repeatedly to select “XM” as the input

source.

The XM indicator lights up in the front panel display

and the XM Satellite Radio information (such as

channel number, channel name, category, and artist

name/song title) for the currently selected channel

appears in the front panel display.

Hint

When you select “XM” as the input source, this unit

automatically recalls the previously selected channel.

Note

If a status message or an error message appears in the

front panel display, refer to the “XM Satellite Radio”

section in “Troubleshooting” on page 68 for

appropriate remedies.

2 Search for a channel by using one of the XM Satellite

Radio search modes.

– To select a channel from the all channel list, refer

to “All Channel Search mode” on page 51.

– To select a channel by category, refer to “Category

Search mode” on page 51.

– To select a channel from the preset channels, refer

to “Preset Search mode” on page 51.

– To select the desired channel directly by entering

the channel number, refer to “Direct number access

mode” on page 52.

All Channel Search mode

1 Press SRCH MODE repeatedly to select “ALL CH

SEARCH”.

2 Press PRESET/CH / repeatedly to search

for a channel within all channels.

Hint

You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and

holding PRESET/CH / .

Category Search mode

1 Press SRCH MODE repeatedly to select “CAT

SEARCH”.

2 Press A-E/CAT. / repeatedly to change the

channel category.

3 Press PRESET/CH / repeatedly to search

for a channel within the selected channel category.

Hint

You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and

holding PRESET/CH / .

Preset Search mode

Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search

mode, you must preset XM Satellite Radio channels. For

details, refer to “Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset

channels” on page 52.

Hint

The initial factory setting of all preset channels (A1 to

E8) is “001 Preview”.

1 Press SRCH MODE repeatedly to select “PRESET

SEARCH”.

2 Press A-E/CAT. / repeatedly to change the

preset channel group (A to E).

3 Press PRESET/CH / repeatedly to change

the preset channel number (1 to 8).

Hint

You can also select the preset channel number directly

by pressing the Numeric keypad 0-9.

SLEEP

NIGHT

ENHANCER

AUDIO DELAY

AUDIO ANGLE

SUBTITLE

STEREO

ON SCREEN

ZOOM

ON OFF

BLUETOOTH

DISP. MODE

GAMESPORTS

MUSIC

FUNC.

WP87010DVX-700

TV STB

POWER

STANDBY

10KEY

MOVIE

INFO.

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

TOP MENU

SETUP RETURN

CODE SET

MEMORY

LOCK

AUTO

MANUAL

PRESET/CH

ENTER

STB

SRCH MODE

TV VOL

VOLUME

TUNER MUTE

TV INPUT

DVD

USB INPUT 1-4

DOCK

When using Numeric

keypad 0-9

Switch FUNC./10KEY to

10KEY

Numeric keypad 0-9

001 Preview

Lights up

LISTENING TO XM

SATELLITE RADIO BROADCASTS

52 En

Direct number access mode

1 Press SRCH MODE on the remote control repeatedly

to select “ALL CH SEARCH” or “CAT SEARCH”.

2 Press the Numeric keypad 0-9 to enter the desired

3-digit channel number.

For example, to select the channel “123”, enter 123

using Numeric keypad 0-9.

Hints

– To enter a 1-digit or 2-digit channel number, press

the Numeric keypad 0-9 on the remote control

and then press ENTER to confirm the input

number.

– Instead of pressing ENTER to tune into the

channel immediately, you can wait a few seconds

until this unit confirms the entered channel

number.

■ Setting the XM Satellite Radio

preset channels

You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite

Radio channels (A1 to E8: 8 preset channel numbers in

each of the 5 preset channel groups). You can recall any

preset channel easily by selecting the preset channel group

and number as described in “Preset Search mode” on

page 51.

1 Search for a channel you want to set as a preset

channel by using one of the XM Satellite Radio search

modes.

Refer to “Basic XM Satellite Radio operations” on

page 51 for details.

2 Press MEMORY.

The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel

display for approximately 30 seconds.

Note

You must proceed to and carry out steps 3 and 4 while

the MEMORY indicator is flashing in the front panel

display.

3 Press PRESET/CH / repeatedly to select a

preset channel group and number (A1 to E8) while the

MEMORY indicator is flashing.

The preset channel number appears in the front panel

display.

Hint

You can select the preset station group (A to E) by

pressing A-E/CAT. / repeatedly.

4 Press MEMORY to set the selected XM Satellite

Radio channel as a preset channel while the

MEMORY indicator is flashing.

A colon (:) appears next to the preset channel number

for confirmation, and the MEMORY indicator turns

off in the front panel display.

Note

Once you set a new preset channel, the one previously

stored in the same preset channel group and number is

overwritten.

INFO.

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

TOP MENU

SETUP RETURN

CODE SET

MEMORY

AUTO

MANUAL

PRESET/CH

ENTER

STB

SRCH MODE

043 XMU

Currently selected channel number

Flashes

C5 043 XMU

Flashes

Selected preset channel group and number

C5:043 XMU

Colon (:)

Goes off

LISTENING TO XM

SATELLITE RADIO BROADCASTS

53 En

OTHER FUNCTIONS

English

■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio

information

You can display the XM Satellite Radio information (such

as channel number, channel name, category, artist name,

or song title) for the currently selected channel in the front

panel display.

Note

If a status message or an error message appears in the

front panel display, refer to the “XM Satellite Radio”

section in “Troubleshooting” on page 68 for

appropriate remedies.

Press INFO. repeatedly to toggle between the following

XM Satellite Radio information display modes.

Hints

– The front panel display can indicate up to 14

alphanumeric characters at once. If the information

contains more than 14 alphanumeric characters, it

starts scrolling.

– If the XM Satellite Radio information contains a

character that cannot be recognized by this unit, the

character will be displayed with a space.

– To hold the current XM Radio information, press

ENTER on the remote control while it is being

displayed. The HOLD indicator flashes in the front

panel display while you are holding the XM

information. Press ENTER again to release the

held information.

– When the antenna of the XM Mini-Tuner Home

Dock cannot receive the signals, “NO SIGNAL”

appears in the front panel display.

CHANNEL INFO

e.g.) 043 XMU

Channel number/name

CATEGORY INFO

e.g.) ROCK

Channel category

SONG INFO

e.g.) Coldplay / Sp

Artist name / Song title

ANTENNA INFO

e.g.) 043 ANT: -

Channel number/Antenna reception level

DSP PROG. INFO

e.g.) STEREO

Sound field program

Back to “CHANNEL INFO”

INFO.

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

TOP MENU

SETUP RETURN

CODE SET

MEMORY

AUTO

MANUAL

PRESET/CH

ENTER

STB

SRCH MODE

54 En

SIRIUS Satellite Radio provides over 130 channels of

exclusive entertainment and 100% commercial-free

music. Only SIRIUS has more than 65 original music

channels, from today’s hits to R&B, oldies, and classical

masterpieces. From authentic country and real bluegrass

to cool jazz, hot latin, reggae, rock and many more. Best

of all, it’s all 100% commercial-free.

SIRIUS also has more than 55 channels of world-class

sports, news and entertainment. Included as part of your

subscription, you get up to 16 NFL games a week, up to

40 NBA games a week and up to 40 NHL games a week.

(Games are broadcast during their respective seasons.)

Coupled with great sports news from ESPN, the SIRIUS

sports offering is unrivaled. And don’t forget a host of

other great news and entertainment, like NPR, CNBC, Fox

News, Radio Disney and E! Entertainment Radio. For

more information, visit http://www.sirius.com/.

■ Connecting the SiriusConnect™

tuner

Connect the SiriusConnect tuner (sold separately) to the

SIRIUS terminal on the rear panel of the unit. For details,

see the operating instructions provided with the

SiriusConnect tuner.

Hints

– To ensure optimal reception of the SIRIUS

Satellite Radio signals, the antenna of the

SiriusConnect tuner must be placed at or near a

window with no obstacles in the path to the sky.

The orientation of the antenna for the best

reception differs depending on the area. Refer to

the instruction manuals supplied with the

SiriusConnect tuner for the installation of the

antenna. You can mount it indoors or outdoors.

– Use the “ANTENNA INFO” information in the

front panel display to check the antenna reception

level and adjust the orientation of the antenna.

– You need to connect the SiriusConnect tuner to the

AC wall outlet.

Notes

– If “CHECK SR TUNER” or “ANTENNA

ERROR” appears in the front panel display, the

connection of the SiriusConnect tuner or antenna is

incorrect. In such cases, check the connection of

the SiriusConnect tuner and the antenna.

– If “NOT SUPPORTED” appears in the front panel

display, the unit does not support the connected

SiriusConnect tuner.

LISTENING TO SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO™ BROADCASTS

SIRIUS Satellite Radio legal disclaimer

SIRIUS is available in the U.S.A. for subscribers with

addresses in the continental U.S.A. and is available in

Canada for subscribers with a Canadian address. To

Get SIRIUS Satellite Radio a subscription and

compatible tuner and antenna are required and sold

separately. Visit sirius.com for the most complete and

up-to-date channel lineup and information.

“SIRIUS” and the SIRIUS dog logo and related marks

are trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.

DOCK

SIRIUS

SiriusConnect tuner

and the antenna (sold

separately)

To the AC wall outlet

LISTENING TO SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO™ BROADCASTS

55 En

OTHER FUNCTIONS

English

■ Activating SIRIUS Satellite

Radio™ subscription

Before using the SIRIUS Satellite Radio feature, you need

to activate your SIRIUS Satellite Radio subscription. To

activate the subscription you need the Sirius ID which is

uniquely assigned to the SiriusConnect tuner. Sirius ID is

a 12-digit number and it appears on the package of the

SiriusConnect tuner, on the label of the SiriusConnect

tuner, and when you tune into the SIRIUS Satellite Radio

channel “0” (see below).

Displaying the Sirius ID of your

SiriusConnect™ tuner

1 Press TUNER repeatedly to select “SIRIUS” as the

input source.

2 Press “0” (on the Numeric keypad 0-9) and

ENTER to display the Sirius ID of your

SiriusConnect tuner.

“000 Sirius IDxxxxxxxxxxxx” (“xxxxxxxxxxxx”

indicates the 12-digit Sirius ID of your SiriusConnect

tuner) appears in the front panel display.

Hints

– You can also display the Sirius ID by entering

“000”.

– To scroll the message again, press INFO..

Write the Sirius ID below.

ID___________________________

3 Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to activate your

subscription.

Hint

Status messages appear in the front panel display

during the activation. Once the activation is finished,

“SUB UPDATED” appears.

■ Basic SIRIUS Satellite Radio™

operations

1 Press TUNER repeatedly to select “SIRIUS” as the

input source.

The SIRIUS indicator lights up in the front panel

display and the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information

(such as channel number, channel name, category, and

artist name/song title) for the currently selected

channel appears in the front panel display.

Hint

When you select “SIRIUS” as the input source, this

unit automatically recalls the previously selected

channel.

Notes

– When you have not activated your subscription yet,

you can only select “184” or “000”.

– If a status message or an error message appears in

the front panel display, refer to the “SIRIUS

Satellite Radio” section in “Troubleshooting” on

page 69 for appropriate remedies.

2 Search for a channel by using one of the SIRIUS

Satellite Radio search modes.

– To select a channel from the all channel list, refer

to “All Channel Search mode” on page 56.

– To select a channel by category, refer to “Category

Search mode” on page 56.

– To select a channel from the preset channels, refer

to “Preset Search mode” on page 56.

– To select the desired channel directly by entering

the channel number, refer to “Direct number access

mode” on page 56.

SLEEP

NIGHT

ENHANCER

AUDIO DELAY

AUDIO ANGLE

SUBTITLE

STEREO

ON SCREEN

ZOOM

ON OFF

BLUETOOTH

DISP. MODE

GAMESPORTS

MUSIC

FUNC.

WP87010DVX-700

TV STB

POWER

STANDBY

10KEY

MOVIE

INFO.

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

TOP MENU

SETUP RETURN

CODE SET

MEMORY

LOCK

AUTO

MANUAL

PRESET/CH

ENTER

STB

SRCH MODE

TV VOL

VOLUME

TUNER MUTE

TV INPUT

DVD

USB INPUT 1-4

DOCK

When using Numeric

keypad 0-9

Switch FUNC./10KEY to

10KEY

Numeric keypad 0-9

SIRIUS Satellite Radio online

information

Contact for activation

URL: https//activate.siriusradio.com/

Phone: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474)

184 SIRIUS Wea

Flashes

LISTENING TO SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO™ BROADCASTS

56 En

Hints

– If you tune into a channel that you do not

subscribe, “CALL 888-539-SIRIUS TO

SUBSCRIBE CH xxx” appears in the front panel

display. To scroll the message again, press INFO..

– You can set the SIRIUS Satellite Radio preset

channels (Page 57).

– You can display the SIRIUS Satellite Radio

information in the front panel display (Page 59).

All Channel Search mode

1 Press SRCH MODE repeatedly to select “ALL CH

SEARCH”.

2 Press PRESET/CH / repeatedly to search

for a channel within all channels.

Hints

– You can search for a channel quickly by pressing

and holding PRESET/CH / .

– You can skip channels to the previous or next

category by pressing A-E/CAT. / .

Category Search mode

1 Press SRCH MODE repeatedly to select “CAT

SEARCH”.

2 Press A-E/CAT. / repeatedly to change the

channel category.

3 Press PRESET/CH / repeatedly to search

for a channel within the selected channel category.

Hint

You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and

holding PRESET/CH / .

Note

The system skips the channels when the system is All

Channel Search mode or Category Search mode in the

following cases (it is not malfunction of the system):

– the channel is locked (page 58).

– the channel is out of service.

– you do not subscribe to the channel.

Preset Search mode

Before selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search

mode, you must preset SIRIUS channels. Refer to “Setting

the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ preset channels” on page 57

for details.

1 Press SRCH MODE repeatedly to select “PRESET

SEARCH”.

2 Press A-E/CAT. / repeatedly to change the

preset channel group (A to E).

3 Press PRESET/CH / repeatedly to change

the preset channel number (1 to 8).

Hint

You can also select the preset channel number directly

by pressing the Numeric keypad (1 to 8).

Direct number access mode

1 Press SRCH MODE on the remote control repeatedly

to select “ALL CH SEARCH” or “CAT SEARCH”.

2 Press the Numeric keypad 0-9 to enter the desired

3-digit channel number.

For example, to select the channel “123”, enter 123

using Numeric keypad 0-9.

Hints

– To display the Sirius ID number displayed in the

front panel display, select channel “0”.

– To enter a 1-digit or 2-digit channel number, press

the Numeric keypad 0-9 and then press ENTER

to confirm the input number.

– Instead of pressing ENTER to tune into the

channel immediately, you can wait a few seconds

until the system confirms the entered channel

number.

– If the selected channel is locked, “PIN:___”

appears in the front panel display. Enter the 4-digit

Parental Lock code number by using the Numeric

keypad 0-9 or press LOCK to cancel (Page 58).

LISTENING TO SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO™ BROADCASTS

57 En

OTHER FUNCTIONS

English

■ Setting the SIRIUS Satellite

Radio™ preset channels

You can use this feature to store up to 40 SIRIUS Satellite

Radio channels (A1 to E8: 8 preset channel numbers in

each of the 5 preset channel groups). You can recall any

preset channel easily by selecting the preset channel group

and number as described in “Preset Search mode” on page

(Page 56).

1 Search for a channel you want to set as a preset

channel by using one of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio

search modes.

Refer to “Basic SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ operations”

on page 55 for details.

2 Press MEMORY.

The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel

display for approximately 30 seconds.

Note

You must proceed to and carry out steps 3 and 4 while

the MEMORY indicator is flashing in the front panel

display.

3 Press PRESET/CH / repeatedly to select a

preset channel group and number (A1 to E8) while the

MEMORY indicator is flashing.

The preset channel number appears in the front panel

display.

Hint

You can select the preset station group (A to E) by

pressing A-E/CAT. / repeatedly.

4 Press MEMORY to set the selected SIRIUS Satellite

Radio channel as a preset channel while the

MEMORY indicator is flashing.

A colon (:) appears next to the preset channel number

for confirmation, and the MEMORY indicator turns

off in the front panel display.

Note

Once you set a new preset channel, the one previously

stored in the same preset channel group and number is

overwritten.

INFO.

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

TOP MENU

SETUP RETURN

CODE SET

MEMORY

LOCK

AUTO

MANUAL

PRESET/CH

ENTER

STB

SRCH MODE

001 SIRIUS Hit

Currently selected channel number

Flashes

A1 023 Hair Na

Currently selected preset channel group and

number

Flashes

A1:023 Hair Na

Colon (:)

Goes off

LISTENING TO SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO™ BROADCASTS

58 En

■ Setting the Parental Lock

You can use the Parental Lock feature to limit the access

to the desired SIRIUS Satellite channels. The system

automatically skips the locked channels when the system

is in the All Channel Search mode or Category Search

mode and you search a channel by pressing PRESET/CH

/ .

Locking/Unlocking channels

Use this feature to set the Parental Lock code number

(PIN) and select the channels to be locked.

1 Press TUNER repeatedly to select “SIRIUS” as the

input source.

2 Press LOCK.

“PARENTAL LOCK” appears in the front panel

display.

3 Press ENTER.

“NEW PIN:0000” appears.

Hint

If the Parental Lock code number is already set,

“PIN:___” appears instead of “NEW PIN:0000”.

Note

If a SiriusConnect tuner is not connected to the unit,

“Not Available” appears.

4 Press A-E/CAT. / to select the place you want

to change, then enter a number by pressing Numeric

keypad 0-9.

Complete the other places using the same procedure.

Keep the parental lock code number secure. You need

it the next time you change the number again.

PIN________

Hints

– To cancel the setting, press LOCK during the

setting.

– If you forget the password, restore to the factory

defaults. Refer to “System menu” on page 65 for

details.

– Each time you enter a number, the cursor moves to

the next place.

– You can change the number by moving the cursor

to the place again.

5 Press ENTER to confirm the setting.

6 Select a channel you want to lock.

Refer to “Basic SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ operations”

on page 55 for details.

7 Press ENTER to set the parental lock.

Once the parental lock is set, the channel number is

displayed with asterisk “*”.

Hint

Each time you press ENTER, lock (asterisk “*”

appears) and unlock (asterisk “*” disappears) switches

in sequence.

8 Repeat the steps 6 and 7 to lock other channels.

9 Press LOCK to return to the original display.

Hint

To cancel the parental lock using the same procedures

as when you have locked the channel. Once the lock is

canceled, the asterisk “*” disappears.

SLEEP

NIGHT

ENHANCER

AUDIO DELAY

AUDIO ANGLE

SUBTITLE

STEREO

ON SCREEN

ZOOM

ON OFF

BLUETOOTH

DISP. MODE

GAMESPORTS

MUSIC

FUNC.

WP87010DVX-700

TV STB

POWER

STANDBY

10KEY

MOVIE

INFO.

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

TOP MENU

SETUP RETURN

CODE SET

MEMORY

LOCK

AUTO

MANUAL

PRESET/CH

ENTER

STB

SRCH MODE

TV VOL

VOLUME

TUNER MUTE

TV INPUT

When using Numeric

keypad 0-9

Switch FUNC./10KEY to

10KEY

Numeric keypad 0-9

NEW PIN:0000

PIN:1234 OK

L001 SIRIUS Hi

L001*SIRIUS Hi

LISTENING TO SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO™ BROADCASTS

59 En

OTHER FUNCTIONS

English

Tuning into the locked channels

You can tune into the locked channels by the Direct

number access mode or preset tuning mode. When you

tune into the locked channel, following message appears

in the front panel display. Enter the code number you set

for the parental lock feature by using Numeric keypad

0-9.

Notes

– Enter each code number within 10 seconds.

– If the entered code number is incorrect, “Wrong”

appears in the front panel display.

– To cancel the tuning, press LOCK.

■ Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite

Radio™ information

You can display the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information

(such as channel number, channel name, category, artist

name, composer name, or song title) for the currently

selected channel in the front panel display.

Note

If a status message or an error message appears in the

front panel display, refer to the “SIRIUS Satellite

Radio” section in “Troubleshooting” on page 69 for

appropriate remedies.

Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite Radio

information in the front panel display

Press INFO. repeatedly to toggle between the following

SIRIUS Satellite Radio information display modes.

Hints

– The front panel display can indicate up to 14

alphanumeric characters at once. If the information

contains more than 14 alphanumeric characters, it

starts scrolling.

– If the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information contains

a character that cannot be recognized by the

system, the character will be displayed with a

space.

– To hold the current SIRIUS Satellite Radio

information, press ENTER on the remote control

while it is being displayed. The HOLD indicator

flashes in the front panel display while you are

holding the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information.

Press ENTER again to release the held

information.

– When the antenna of the SiriusConnect tuner

cannot receive the signals, “ACQUIRING” appears

in the front panel display.

– When an information is unavailable, “----” appears.

PIN:

____

INFO.

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

TOP MENU

SETUP RETURN

CODE SET

PRESET/CH

ENTER

CHANNEL INFO

e.g.) 008 Big '80s

Channel number/name

CATEGORY INFO

e.g.) Pop

Channel category

SONG INFO

e.g.) Sanumemo / Roa

Artist name / Song title

COMPOSER INFO

e.g.) Frankie Zipper

Composer name

ANTENNA INFO

e.g.) 043 ANT: -

Channel number/Antenna reception level

DSP PROG. INFO

e.g.) STEREO

Sound field program

Back to “CHANNEL INFO”

60 En

■ Using iPod™

Once you have stationed your iPod in the Yamaha iPod

universal dock (such as YDS-10/ YDS-11, sold

separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of the

subwoofer/system control (Page 20), you can enjoy

playback on your iPod.

Supported iPod

iPod (Click and Wheel)

iPod touch

iPod nano

iPod mini

Battery charge feature

This system charges the battery of an iPod stationed in the

Yamaha iPod universal dock connected to the DOCK

terminal of the subwoofer/system control while this

system is turned on.

Stationing your iPod in the Yamaha iPod

universal dock

Once you station your iPod in the Yamaha iPod universal

dock, “iPod connected” and the DOCK indicator appear in

the front panel display.

Notes

– Some features may not be available depending on

the model or the software version of your iPod.

– For a complete list of status messages that appear

in the front panel display, Refer to the “iPod”

section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” (Page 67).

– Be sure to set the volume to minimum before

docking or removing your iPod.

DOCK

Set the input source to DOCK.

Playback control buttons

Controls the connected iPod.

Cursor buttons ( / / / )/ENTER

Navigates the menus on your iPod.

– Press to move to a previous menu level.

– Press / to move the cursor to an upper/

lower menu.

–Press ENTER or to confirm the selected menu.

–Press ENTER in the “Songs” level menu screen to

play the selected song.

INFO.

Switches between simple remote mode and menu browse

mode.

Controlling your iPod in simple remote

mode

Docking your iPod in the Yamaha iPod universal dock

(such as YDS-10 or YDS-11, sold separately) enters

simple remote mode. You can perform the basic

operations of your iPod (play, stop, skip backward/

forward, etc.) using the supplied remote control in this

mode.

Hint

Operations can be also done with the controls on your

iPod. Refer to the instruction manuals of your iPod for

information about these operations.

USING OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT

PLAY MODE

INFO.

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

TOP MENU

SETUP RETURN

CODE SET

CLEAR

MEMORY

LOCK

AUTO

MANUAL

PRESET/CH

ENTER

STB

TV VOL

VOLUME

TUNER MUTE

TV INPUT

DVD

USB INPUT 1-4

DOCK

SRCH MODE

h: Play/pause (Normal mode),

Play (Menu browse mode)

e: Play/pause (Normal mode),

Pause (Menu browse mode)

s:Stop

b / a: Skip backward/forward.

When you press b just after a song

has started, skip backward to the

beginning of the previous song.

w / f: Search backward/forward.

USING OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT

61 En

OTHER FUNCTIONS

English

Controlling your iPod in menu browse

mode

Song information and play lists are displayed in the front

panel display so that you can select and play back songs or

adjust settings using the supplied remote control in this

mode.

Notes

– Operations cannot be done with the controls of

your iPod.

– Characters that cannot be displayed in the front

panel display are replaced with underscores “_”.

1 Press INFO. to enter menu browse mode.

2 Press / / / repeatedly to select the

desired menu, and then press ENTER to play back the

selected song.

Shuffle

Use this feature to set the system to play songs or albums

in random order.

Options: Off, Songs, Album

You can switch each option by pressing ENTER.

– Select “Off” to deactivate this feature.

– Select “Songs” to set the system to play songs in

random order.

– Select “Album” to set the system to play albums in

random order.

Repeat

Use this feature to set the system to repeat one song or a

sequence of songs.

Options: Off, One, All

You can switch each option by pressing ENTER.

– Select “Off” to deactivate this feature.

– Select “One” to set the system to repeat one song.

– Select “All” to set the system to repeat a sequence

of songs.

Note

The contents of the iPod menu vary, depending on the

model or the generation.

■ Using Bluetooth™ components

You can connect the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio

receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately) to the DOCK

terminal of the subwoofer/system control and enjoy the

music contents stored in your Bluetooth component (such

as a portable music player or computer equipped with a

Bluetooth transmitter, etc.) without connecting it to the

system. You need to perform “pairing” of the connected

Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and your

Bluetooth component in advance.

DOCK

Set the input source to DOCK.

BLUETOOTH ON / BLUETOOTH OFF

– Start or cancel the pairing.

– Connect or disconnect a Bluetooth component.

Playback control buttons

Control the playback of a Bluetooth component.

h: Play

e: Pause

s: Stop

b / a: Skip backward/forward

Options Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

Playlists Playlist Song list

Artists Artist list Album list Song list

Albums Album list Song list

Songs Song list

Genres Genre list Artist list Album list Song list

Composers

Composer

list

Album list Song list

Settings Setting list

AUDIO

PLAY MODE

INFO.

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

TOP MENU

SETUP RETURN

CODE SET

ANGLE

CLEAR

MEMORY

LOCK

SUBTITLE

AUTO

MANUAL

PRESET/CH

ENTER

STB

TV VOL

VOLUME

TUNER MUTE

TV INPUT

DVD

USB INPUT 1-4

DOCK

SRCH MODE

ON OFF

BLUETOOTH

USING OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT

62 En

Pairing the Yamaha Bluetooth™

wireless audio receiver and your

Bluetooth™ component

Pairing must be performed before using a Bluetooth

component with the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio

receiver connected to the system for the first time or if

the registered pairing data has been deleted. “Pairing”

refers to the operation of registering a Bluetooth

component for Bluetooth communications.

1 Connect the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio

receiver to the DOCK terminal of the subwoofer/

system control. (Page 20)

2 Press DOCK to set the input source to DOCK.

3 Turn on the Bluetooth component you want to pair

with, and then enter pairing mode.

Refer to the instruction manual of your Bluetooth

component for details.

4 Press and hold BLUETOOTH ON for more than 3

seconds to start pairing.

“Searching...” appears when the pairing starts. While

the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver is in

pairing mode, the DOCK indicator flashes in the front

panel display.

Hint

To cancel the pairing, press BLUETOOTH OFF.

5 Check that the Bluetooth component detects the

Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver.

If the Bluetooth component detects the Yamaha

Bluetooth wireless audio receiver, the audio receiver

name (“YBA-10 YAMAHA” for example) appears in

the device list of the Bluetooth component.

6 Select the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver

in the device list of the Bluetooth component, and then

enter the pass key “0000” on the Bluetooth

component.

When the pairing procedure is successful,

“Completed” appears in the front panel display.

Hints

– If the pairing is not completed within 8 minutes,

“Not found” appears and the DOCK indicator is

turned off in the front panel display.

– If the pairing is canceled during the pairing,

“Canceled” appears in the front panel display.

Note

The Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver can be

paired with up to eight Bluetooth components. When

pairing is conducted successfully with a ninth

component and the pairing data is registered, the

pairing data for another least recently used component

is deleted.

Establishing a connection

After the pairing is completed, perform the connecting

operation on the system or on the Bluetooth component to

enable communication between them. The connecting

operation on the system is only available for the most

recently connected Bluetooth component.

1 Press DOCK to set the input to DOCK.

2 Press BLUETOOTH ON to start a connection.

“Searching...” appears in the front panel display.

When the system finds the last connected Bluetooth

component, “BT connected” appears in the front panel

display for 3 seconds.

Hints

– If the system cannot find the last connected

Bluetooth component, “Not found” appears in the

front panel display.

– If you want to establish a connection with a

Bluetooth component other than the one most

recently connected to, connect from that Bluetooth

component. Refer to the instruction manual of your

Bluetooth component for details.

Disconnecting

Press DOCK, and then BLUETOOTH OFF to

disconnect the system from the Bluetooth component.

“Disconnected” appears in the front panel display.

Playing back the Bluetooth

component

You can play back your Bluetooth component using the

supplied remote control.

You can also play back your Bluetooth component by

operating it directly.

Hint

Operation using the remote control is available only

when the connection is established between the

Bluetooth component you want to play back and the

system.

To ensure security, a time limit of 8 minutes is set for

the pairing operation. Please read and fully understand

all the instructions before starting.

63 En

English

USEFUL OPERATION

■ Adjusting the audio delay

FPD TV images sometimes lag behind the sound. You can

use this function to delay the sound output to synchronize

it with the video image.

1 Press AUDIO DELAY to enter adjusting mode.

2 Press / to adjust the delay time.

Options: 0 to 240 ms

You can adjust the delay time by the 10 ms.

3 Press AUDIO DELAY again or ENTER to exit

adjusting mode.

Hints

– The default setting is 0 ms and “DELAY OFF”

appears in the front panel display.

– The system memorizes the settings assigned to

each input source.

Notes

If you do not operate this function within 30 seconds

after entering adjusting mode, the system

automatically exits adjusting mode.

■ Listening at low volume (night

listening mode)

Night listening mode enables you to listen to dialog or

vocals more clearly at lower volume by suppressing

louder sound effects. This function is useful when playing

sources with wide dynamic range of the sound at night.

Press NIGHT.

“NIGHT ON” appears in the front panel display.

The NIGHT indicator lights up when night listening mode

is selected.

Hints

– To cancel night listening mode, press NIGHT

again.

– When this function is on, compressed music

enhancer mode is automatically set to off.

(Page 45)

– The setting is set for all the input sources.

USEFUL OPERATION

SLEEP

NIGHT

ENHANCER

AUDIO DELAY

AUDIO ANGLE

SUBTITLE

STEREO

ON SCREEN

ZOOM

ON OFF

BLUETOOTH

DISP. MODE

GAMESPORTS

MUSIC

FUNC.

WP87010DVX-700

TV STB

POWER

STANDBY

10KEY

MOVIE

INFO.

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

TOP MENU

SETUP RETURN

CODE SET

PRESET/CH

ENTER

Switch FUNC./10KEY

to FUNC.

DELAY 120ms

Setting value

SLEEP

NIGHT

ENHANCER

AUDIO DELAY

STEREO

ON SCREEN

ZOOM

BLUETOOTH

DISP. MODE

GAMESPORTS

MUSIC

FUNC.

WP87010DVX-700

TV STB

POWER

STANDBY

10KEY

MOVIE

Switch FUNC./10KEY

to FUNC.

NIGHT ON

Lights up

USEFUL OPERATION

64 En

■ Adjusting the audio balance for

the playback

You can adjust the volume balance of the virtual speakers

and subwoofer.

1 Press SOUND repeatedly to select the item you want

to adjust.

Each time you press SOUND, the item changes to

subwoofer, center and surround.

SWFR

Adjusts the output level of the subwoofer channel.

CENTER

Adjusts the output level of the center virtual speaker

channel.

SUR.

Adjusts the output level of the surround virtual speaker

channels.

2 Use / to adjust the volume balance.

You can adjust the balance from +6 to –6.

Hints

– The volume balance setting for the virtual surround

speaker is assigned to both left and right channels.

– You can also adjust the speaker volume while the

test tone is output. (Page 45)

– The setting is set for all the input sources.

Note

You cannot check the volume balance of the center

virtual speaker and surround virtual speaker when the

surround mode is off. Set the surround mode to on to

check the volume balance.

■ Changing the brightness of the

front panel display

You can change the brightness of the front panel display.

You can also turn off the front panel display to view a

movie in a darker environment.

Press DISP. MODE repeatedly.

Each time you press DISP. MODE, the brightness of the

front panel display changes.

The front panel display lights up momentarily when any

operation is performed while DISPLAY OFF is selected.

Hints

– The default setting is DIMMER OFF.

– Only the power indicator remains lit in DISPLAY

OFF mode.

INFO.

A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.

TOP MENU

SETUP RETURN

CODE SET

PRESET/CH

ENTER

STB

TUNER MUTE

TV INPUT

DVD

USB INPUT 1-4

POSITION

AREA SOUND TEST

DOCK

SLEEP

NIGHT

ENHANCER

AUDIO DELAY

AUDIO

PLAY MODE

ANGLE

CLEAR

LOCK

SUBTITLE

STEREO

ON SCREEN

ZOOM

ON OFF

BLUETOOTH

DISP. MODE

* Selecting “DISPLAY OFF” turns off the front

panel display. Before it turns off, “DISPLAY

OFF” appears briefly in the front panel display.

Bright

Dark

USEFUL OPERATION

65 En

USEFUL OPERATION

English

■ Setting the sleep timer

The sleep timer function sets the system to the standby

mode automatically at the preset time.

Press SLEEP repeatedly until the desired turn-off time is

displayed.

The preset time appears on the front panel display.

Select [OFF] to cancel the sleep timer.

■ System menu

This feature allows you to initialize the settings (such as

DVD setting) or change the HDMI audio output settings

by opening a specialized menu (system menu) for this

purpose.

1 Set the system to standby mode.

2 Press and hold INPUT and e on the DVD controller,

then press STANDBY/ON.

Keep holding INPUT and e until “SYSTEM MENU”

appears in the front panel display.

The system menu appears on the front panel display.

3 Press / to select the item you want.

1:DVD INIT

Resets the settings for DVD settings to the initial factory

settings.

2:HDMI INIT

Resets the settings for HDMI settings to the initial factory

settings.

3:HDMI A ON

Select if the audio signal is output from the HDMI

terminal. Select [ON] to output the audio signal to HDMI

components such as TV.

4:HDMI A OFF

Select if the audio signal is output from the HDMI

terminal. Select [OFF] not to output the audio signal to

HDMI components such as TV.

5:SIRIUS P.CLR

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

Clears the parental lock code for the SiriusConnect tuner.

4 Press ENTER to confirm.

“*” is displayed on the left side of the selected item in

the front panel display.

Each time you press ENTER, set (asterisk “*”

appears) and cancel (asterisk “*” disappears) switches

in sequence.

The settings will be activated the next time you turn

on this unit. Press STANDBY/ON to set the system to

the standby mode, then turn on the power again.

Hints

– If you select other items before the system is set to

the standby mode, the item you confirmed is

canceled.

SLEEP

NIGHT

ENHANCER

AUDIO DELAY

AUDIO

PLAY MODE

ANGLE

CLEAR

LOCK

SUBTITLE

STEREO

ON SCREEN

ZOOM

ON OFF

BLUETOOTH

DISP. MODE

SLEEP 120min

Flashes

OFF

30 min.

60 min.

90 min.

120 min.

SYSTEM MENU

1:DVD INIT

USEFUL OPERATION

66 En

– The next time you turn on the system after

selecting an item between 1 and 4 in the system

menu, the system starts with DVD as an input

source.

■ Setting the preset code

You can use the remote control to control the power, TV

input, channel, and volume for up to two components,

such as TV or Set top box (STB). Set the preset codes

depending on the components.

Hint

The preset cords are set to “298” (TV) and “748”

(STB) as the default settings.

1 Switch TV/STB to the side you want to set.

2 Press and hold CODE SET, then press POWER.

3 Point the remote control toward the remote control

sensor on the DVD controller and enter a 3-digit code

while holding CODE SET.

Refer to “LIST OF PRESET CODES” on the

appendix for the corresponding codes.

4 Release CODE SET.

If the preset cord is set correctly, “PRESET OK!”

appears in the front panel display.

Note

If you have failed to set the preset code, “PRESET

NG!” appears in the front panel display. Try to set it

again.

Hints

– When you select the preset cord for “cable” or

“DBS”, you can use only POWER and CH +/–. If

a preset cord for “TV” is set on the other side, you

can use TV VOL +/– or TV INPUT to control TV.

– To set another preset code, switch TV/STB to the

other side and repeat the step 2 to step 4.

Operating a TV/STB

Once you set the preset code, you can operate your TV/

STB.

1 Switch TV/STB to the side, which the preset code is

set.

2 Press the button you want to operate.

SLEEP

NIGHT

ENHANCER

AUDIO DELAY

AUDIO ANGLE

SUBTITLE

STEREO

ON SCREEN

ZOOM

ON OFF

BLUETOOTH

DISP. MODE

GAMESPORTS

MUSIC

FUNC.

WP87010DVX-700

TV STB

POWER

STANDBY

10KEY

MOVIE

A-E/CAT.

A-E

SETUP RETURN

CODE SET

ENTER

STB

Switches TV or STB.

67 En

English

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

If there is any problem with your unit, check the following items. If you cannot solve your problem with the following

remedies or if your problem is not listed below, turn off the system and unplug the unit, then consult the nearest

authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.

General

TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

Power turns on but immediately shuts

off.

The power cable may be connected

improperly.

Make sure the power cable is plugged

into the outlet firmly.

A speaker cable may be shorted. Make sure all speaker cables are

connected properly.

This system may have received a

strong electrical shock, such as from a

lightening bolt or excessive static

electricity.

Set this system to standby mode, and

then disconnect the power cable. Wait

for about 30 seconds, connect the

power cable, and then turn the system

on again.

20, 22

The speakers make no sound. The volume may be set to minimum

level.

Adjust the volume level. 5, 10

The mute function may be activated. Cancel the mute function. 10

The input source or input setting may

be incorrect.

Select the correct input source or input

setting.

5, 10

The cables may be connected

improperly.

Make sure all cables are connected

properly.

Sound is too low on one side. The cables may be connected

improperly.

Make sure all cables are connected

properly.

Speaker channels other than the front

ones make no sound.

You may be listening to stereo sounds

without surround mode.

Press a surround mode button to enable

the sound field effect.

The virtual speaker channel makes no

sound.

The volume of the center virtual

speaker channel may be set to

minimum level.

Adjust the volume level of the center

virtual speaker channel.

The volume of the surround virtual

speaker channels may be set to

minimum level.

Adjust the volume level of the surround

virtual speaker channels.

The subwoofer makes no sound. The volume of the subwoofer channel

may be set to minimum level.

Adjust the volume level of the

subwoofer.

Sound is poor (noisy). A speaker cable may be shorted. Make sure all cables are connected

properly.

This system does not operate properly. This system may receive a strong

electrical shock, such as from a

lightening bolt or excessive static

electricity, or drop in power supply.

Set this system to standby mode, and

then disconnect the power cable. Wait

for about 30 seconds, connect the

power cable, and then turn on this

system.

20, 22

The system control cable may be

connected improperly.

Connect the system control cable

firmly.

A digital or high-frequency equipment

produces noises.

The system may be placed close to

digital equipment or high-frequency

equipment.

Place this system farther away from

such equipment.

The remote control does not operate

the system.

The system may be outside the remote

control operation range.

For information on the remote control

operation range, refer to “Using the

remote control”.

The remote control sensor of this

system may be exposed to direct

sunlight or lighting.

Change the lighting. --

The batteries may be worn out. Replace the batteries. 21

TROUBLESHOOTING

68 En

Tuner (FM)

XM Satellite Radio

If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear in the front panel

display. In this case, read the causes and follow the corresponding remedies.

The picture is not displayed on the TV

screen.

The TV cables may be connected

improperly.

Make sure all cables are connected

properly.

If the COMPONENT VIDEO

OUTPUT and HDMI connections are

used simultaneously, the

COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT

jacks may output progressive video

signal regardless of the Component Out

setting.

Disconnect the HDMI component, or

connect a TV that supports progressive

video to the COMPONENT VIDEO

OUTPUT jacks.

The picture is not displayed on the TV

screen correctly.

The Video Output settings may be

incorrect.

Check the Video Output settings and

correct as necessary.

The Component Out setting is set to

Progressive, but the TV connected to

the COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT

may not support progressive scanning.

Change the Component Out setting to

Interlace.

The TV connected to the HDMI

OUTPUT terminal may not support the

selected resolution.

Change the HDMI Resolution setting

to a resolution supported by the HDMI

TV.

The message “HDMI ERROR” is

displayed or the picture is not

displayed on the HDMI TV screen.

The wrong HDMI resolution may be

selected or an HDMI error may have

occurred.

Check the HDMI Resolution setting

and correct as necessary.

Reset the HDMI settings. 65

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

FM stereo reception is noisy. The characteristics of FM stereo

broadcasts may cause this problem

when the transmitter is too far away, or

if the antenna quality is poor.

Check the antenna connections. 18

Try using a high-quality directional FM

antenna.

Use the manual tuning method. 46

There is distortion, and clear reception

cannot be obtained, even with a good

FM antenna.

There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna position to

eliminate multi-path interference.

The desired station cannot be tuned

into with the automatic tuning method.

The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM

antenna.

Use the manual tuning method. 46

Status message Cause Remedy

See

page

CHECK XM TUNER The XM Mini-Tuner is not installed in

the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock or the

XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock is not

connected to this unit.

Confirm the XM Mini-Tuner is fully

seated in the dock and check that the

XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock cable is

connected to this unit.

CHECK ANTENNA The XM antenna is not connected to

the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock or the

XM antenna cable has become

damaged.

Check that the XM antenna is securely

connected to the XM Mini-Tuner

Home Dock and check the antenna

cable for damage. Replace the XM

antenna if the cable is damaged.

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

TROUBLESHOOTING

69 En

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

English

SIRIUS Satellite Radio

If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear in the front panel

display. In this case, read the causes and follow the corresponding remedies.

LOADING The XM Mini-Tuner is acquiring audio

or program information from the XM

satellite signal. This message can also

occur in weak XM signal conditions.

Note that this unit may not respond to

some operations while this message is

displayed.

This message should disappear in a few

seconds in good signal conditions. If

you see this message often, reposition

the XM antenna to get better signal

reception. Use the “ANTENNA INFO”

information in the front panel display

or “XM Information” screen in the

video monitor to check the antenna

reception level.

NO SIGNAL The XM Mini-Tuner is not receiving

the XM satellite signal. Something may

be blocking the XM antenna view of

the satellites or the antenna is not

properly aimed.

Check for antenna obstructions and

reposition the XM antenna to get better

signal reception. Use the “ANTENNA

INFO” information in the front panel

display or “XM Information” screen in

the video monitor to check the antenna

reception level. See instructions

supplied with the XM Mini-Tuner and

Dock for antenna installation

information.

OFF AIR The XM channel you selected is not

currently broadcasting.

Check back at a later time; in the mean

time, select another channel.

CH UNAUTH You may be attempting to tune to an

XM channel that is blocked or that you

cannot receive with your XM

subscription package.

Consult the latest channel guide at

http://www.xmradio.com/ (US

residents) and http://www.xmradio.ca/

(Canadian residents) for the current list

of channels. For information on

receiving this channel, visit http://

www.xmradio.com/ (US residents) and

http://www.xmradio.ca/ (Canadian

residents) or contact XM Satellite

Radio at 1-800-967-2346 (US

residents) and 1-877-438-9677

(Canadian residents).

CH UNAVAIL The selected channel is not available.

The channel may have been reassigned

to a different channel number. This

message may occur initially with a new

XM Mini-Tuner that has not received

XM signal for an extended period.

Consult the latest channel guide at

http://www.xmradio.com/ (US

residents) and http://www.xmradio.ca/

(Canadian residents) for the current list

of channels. For the case of a new XM

Mini-Tuner that has not received XM

signal for an extended period, allow the

XM Mini-Tuner to receive the XM

satellite signal for at least 5 minutes

and then try to select the channel again.

- - - - No artist name or song title is available

for this selection.

No action required. --

UPGRADE XM TUNER This unit does not support the

connected XM Mini-Tuner.

Connect a XM Mini-Tuner that is

compatible with XM Rev 4x.

Status message Cause Remedy

See

page

ANTENNA ERROR The antenna is not connected to the

SiriusConnect tuner properly.

Check the connection of the antenna

and SiriusConnect tuner.

Status message Cause Remedy

See

page

TROUBLESHOOTING

70 En

iPod

Note

In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing in the front panel, check the connection to your

iPod.

CHECK SR TUNER The SiriusConnect tuner is not

connected to the SIRIUS terminal of

this unit correctly.

Check the connection of the

SiriusConnect tuner and this unit.

The SiriusConnect tuner is not

connected to the AC wall outlet.

Connect the power cable of the

SiriusConnect tuner to the AC wall

outlet.

NOT SUPPORTED This unit does not support the

connected SIRIUS Satellite Radio

tuner.

Connect the SiriusConnect tuner that is

compatible with this unit.

ACQUIRING The signal is too weak. Adjust the orientation of the antenna of

the SiriusConnect tuner. Use the

“ANTENNA INFO” information in the

front panel display or “SIRIUS

Information” screen in the video

monitor to check the antenna reception

level.

UPDATING The SiriusConnect tuner is updating the

channel list.

Wait until the updating is completed. --

The period of the subscription is end. Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to

renew the subscription.

F/W UPDATING The SiriusConnect tuner is updating the

firmware.

Wait until the updating is completed. --

CALL SIRIUS (CALL 888-539-SIRIUS TO

SUBSCRIBE)

The selected channel is not subscribed. Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to

subscribe the selected channel. URL:

https://activate.siriusradio.com/ Phone:

1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474)

Select another channel. --

SUB UPDATED The subscription information is

updated.

-- --

INVALID The selected channel is currently out of

service.

Select another channel. --

Not Available The operation you made is not

available.

-- --

Status message Cause Remedy

See

page

Unknown iPod The iPod being used is not supported

by this system.

Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod

touch, iPod nano, and iPod mini are

supported.

iPod connected Your iPod is properly stationed in the

Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as

YDS-10 or YDS-11, sold separately)

connected to the DOCK terminal of

this system, and the connection

between your iPod and this system is

completed.

-- --

Disconnected Your iPod was removed from the

Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as

YDS-10 or YDS-11, sold separately)

connected to the DOCK terminal of

this system.

Station your iPod back in the Yamaha

iPod universal dock (YDS-10 or YDS-

11, sold separately) connected to the

DOCK terminal of this system.

Status message Cause Remedy

See

page

TROUBLESHOOTING

71 En

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

English

Bluetooth

Note

In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing in the front panel, check your Bluetooth

component.

Disc

Status message Cause Remedy

See

page

Searching... The Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio

receiver (such as YBA-10, sold

separately) and the Bluetooth

component are in the process of the

pairing.

-- --

The Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio

receiver and the Bluetooth component

are in the process of establishing the

connection.

-- --

Completed The pairing is completed. -- --

Canceled The pairing is canceled. -- --

Not found The system cannot find the Bluetooth

component while performing the

pairing or trying to connect to the

Bluetooth component.

-- --

BT connected The connection between the Yamaha

Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and

the Bluetooth component is

established.

-- --

Disconnected The Bluetooth component is

disconnected from the Yamaha

Bluetooth wireless audio receiver.

-- --

Not Available The pairing is performed when the

Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio

receiver is connected to the Bluetooth

component.

Perform the pairing when the Yamaha

Bluetooth wireless audio receiver is not

connected to the Bluetooth component.

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

Some functions do not work. Not all discs support all of the disc

playback functions of this unit.

Try another disc. 2

Playback does not start, the sound or

picture is distorted or playback is

stopped halfway.

The disc is not properly set. Place the disc, label-side up. 26

The disc is dirty. Check the disc and clean as necessary. 2

The loaded disc in not supported. Use only supported disc formats.

The Disc that is not compliant with the

CD Audio specification (e.g. copy

control CD, the non-DVD side of the

DualDisc, etc.) may not play.

Condensation on the pickup lens. When

this system is moved from a cold

environment to a warm one,

condensation may form on the pickup

lens.

Wait for one to two hours for the

condensation to evaporate, then try

again.

After loading a DVD-Video, the same

picture is usually displayed and you

cannot move to the main contents or

the main menu.

The Resume/Last memory function is

effective.

Press s twice to set the Resume

function to off.

Reset the DVD setting to the initial

factory settings (DVD INIT) to clear

the resume point.

TROUBLESHOOTING

72 En

USB

Cannot select foreign language

soundtracks or subtitles.

The loaded disc does not contain

foreign language soundtracks or

subtitles.

See the disc packaging for details on

foreign language soundtracks and

subtitles.

The loaded disc does not allow this

operation.

Select foreign language soundtracks or

subtitles in the disc menu.

Subtitles are not displayed. Subtitles are turned off. Select a subtitle. 29

The loaded disc does not contain

subtitles.

See the disc packaging for details on

subtitles.

When using A-B repeat playback,

subtitles outside of the specified

section may not be displayed.

Turn off A-B repeat playback. 30

Cannot select camera angles. The loaded disc does not contain

multiple camera angles.

See the disc packaging for details on

multiple camera angles.

Cannot play some files. Only MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC, and

JPEG files with no copy protection

(DRM) can be played.

Use files with no copy protection. --

The file is not supported. Use only supported file format. 26,

27, 33

Cannot record a DVD. The DVD is copy protected. Most DVD-Video discs are copy

protected and cannot be recorded.

The TV picture is disturbed. The picture may be disturbed while

rewinding or fast forwarding.

This is not a malfunction. --

The picture is stretched or black bars

are displayed.

The TV Screen setting is set

incorrectly.

Check the TV Screen setting and

change as necessary.

Ghosting appears in some areas of the

picture.

The video material is incompatible

with the Progressive Scanning function

due to the way in which it was edited or

the type of material it is.

Change the Component Out setting to

Interlace.

The disc ejected as soon as it was

loaded.

The loaded disc in not supported. Use only supported disc formats. 2

The message “No Disc” is displayed

even though a disc is loaded.

The disc is not properly inserted into

the disc slot.

Insert the disc, label-side up into the

disc slot.

Cannot display the DVD setup menu,

Initial Settings, and Video Adjust

menus.

These menus can be displayed only

when DVD as the input source is

selected.

Select DVD as the input source. 5, 9

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

Cannot play content stored on a USB

mass storage device.

Not all USB storage devices are

recognized by this unit.

Try another USB storage device. --

Only USB storage devices formatted

with FAT16 or FAT32 are supported.

Reformat the USB storage device with

FAT16 or FAT32.

The USB storage device is connected

to a USB hub, but this unit does not

support USB hubs.

Connect the USB storage device

directly to the USB port of this unit.

Cannot play some files. Only MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC, and

JPEG files with no copy protection

(DRM) can be played.

Use files with no copy protection. --

The file is not supported. Use only supported file format. 33

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

TROUBLESHOOTING

73 En

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

English

The message “NO USB” or “USB

ERROR” is displayed.

The USB device is not compatible, or

this unit cannot supply enough power

to the device for it to function properly.

Turn this unit off and on again. 22

Set this unit to standby, disconnect the

USB storage device, and then

reconnect it.

22, 35

Select the USB input source, and then

connect the USB device.

Select a different input source and

select USB again.

If the USB storage device came with its

own power adapter, use it to power the

USB storage device while connecting

to this unit.

If the message still appears, the USB

storage device is probably

incompatible with this unit.

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

74 En

AAC (Advanced Audio Coding)

An audio compression scheme defined as part of the

MPEG-2/MPEG-4 standard. AAC supports up to 48

channels and generally achieves better sound quality

than MP3 at the same bit rate.

Analog

Sound that has not been turned into numbers.

Analog sound varies, while digital sound has specific

numerical values. These terminals send audio through

two channels, the left and right.

Aspect ratio

The ratio of vertical and horizontal sizes of a displayed

image. The horizontal vs. vertical ratio of conventional

TVs. is 4:3, and that of wide-screens is 16:9.

Bit

Short for binary digit. Represents the smallest unit of

information manipulated on a computer. In audio

systems, the bit size determines resolution to digitize

analog signals.

The larger the bit size, the larger the dynamic range (the

ratio of maximum and minimum frequency level) and

the finer the sounds. Generally, an audio CD is 16 bit

and DVD audio is 24 bit.

Bit rate

The amount of data used to hold a given length of

music; measured in kilobits per second, or kbps. Also,

the speed at which you record. Generally, the higher the

bit rate, or recording speed, the better the sound quality.

However, higher bit rates use more space on a disc.

Component Video

Terminals for inputting or outputting a component video

signal.Component video signal consists of three lines,

the luminance signal (Y) and two color difference

signals (P

, P

), which enable to provide high-

quality video.

Disc menu

A screen display prepared for allowing selection of

images, sounds, subtitles, multi-angles, etc. recorded on

a DVD.

DivX

is a popular media technology created by DivX,

Inc. DivX

media files contain highly compressed

video with high visual quality that maintains a relatively

small file size. DivX

files can also include advanced

media features like menus, subtitles, and alternate audio

tracks. Many DivX

media files are available for

download online, and you can create your own using

your personal content and easy-to-use tools from

DivX.com.

DivX Ultra

DivX

Ultra Certified products provide enhanced

playback of advanced media features supported by the

DivX

Media Format. Key features include interactive

video menus, subtitles, alternate audio tracks, video

tags, and chapter points.

DMF (DivX Media Format)

The DivX

Media Format supports advanced media

features, adding controls for an interactive media

experience: interactive video menus, chapter points,

multi-language subtitles, and alternate audio tracks.

Dolby Digital

Digital surround sound system which is developed by

Dolby Laboratories provides completely independent

multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (left, center,

and right) and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital

provides five full-range audio channels. With an

additional channel especially for bass effects (called

LFE, or low frequency effect), the system has a total of

5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using

2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more

accurate moving sound effects and surround sound

environment are possible than with Dolby Surround.

Dolby Pro Logic II

It is an improved matrix decoding technology that

provides better spatiality and directionality on Dolby

Surround programmed material; provides a convincing

three-dimensional soundfield on conventional stereo

music recordings; and is ideally suited to bring the

surround experience to automotive sound. While

conventional surround programming is fully compatible

with Dolby Pro Logic II decoders, soundtracks will be

able to be encoded specifically to take full advantage of

Pro Logic II playback, including separate left and right

surround channels. (Such material is also compatible

with conventional Pro Logic decoders).

DTS (Digital Theater Systems)

Digital surround sound system developed by Digital

Theater Systems, Inc., which provides 5.1 channel audio

(max). With an abundance of audio data, it is able to

provide authentic-sounding effects.

HDMI

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the

first industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital

audio/video interface. Providing an interface between

any source (such as a set-top box or AV controller) and

an audio/video monitor (such as a digital television),

HDMI supports standard, enhanced or high-definition

video as well as multi-channel digital audio using a

single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC (Advanced

Television Systems Committee) HDTV standards and

supports 8-channel digital audio, with bandwidth to

spare to accommodate future enhancements and

requirements.

When used in combination with HDCP (High-

bandwidth Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides

a secure audio/video interface that meets the security

requirements of content providers and system operators.

For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI

website at “www.hdmi.org/”.

GLOSSARY

75 En

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

English

Interlace

The most common type of scanning used in televisions.

It divides a screen into even and odd numbered fields for

scanning, and then builds an image by combining them

into one image (frame).

JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)

A standardized image compression system proposed by

the Joint Photographic Experts Group. It can reduce

image data sizes to 1 to 10% of their original sizes, and

works on digital photographs effectively.

MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer-3)

An audio file compression technology. It can reduce

audio data sizes to about 10% of their original sizes

while maintaining CD-level audio quality.

MPEG (Moving Pictures Experts Group)

International standard for digital video and audio

compression generated by ISO (International

Organization for Standardization) and IEC

(International Electrotechnical Commission).

Includes MPEG-1, MPEG-2, and MPEG-4. MPEG-1

offers VHS level video quality and is often used on

video CDs. MPEG-2 offers S-VHS level video quality

and is often used on DVDs.

Parental lock

(On DVD) Limits Disc play according to the age of the

users or the limitation level in each country. The

limitation varies from disc to disc; when it is activated,

playback will be prohibited if the software’s level is

higher than the user-set level.

(On Sirius Satellite Radio) Limits the channel (channel

skip) to protect children from inappropriate contents.

The limitation is set by channel basis.

Playback control (PBC)

An on-screen menu recorded on a Video CD or Super

Video CD that enables interactive playback and

searching.

Progressive Scan

A method of displaying all scanning lines in a frame at

once, reducing flicker noticeable on a larger screen and

creating a sharp and smooth image.

Region code

Many DVD discs include a region code so that the

only to regions where they are ready to distribute. There

are six regions codes, which restrict a DVD player to

playing a DVD disc with the same region code.

Surround

A controller for creating realistic three-dimensional

sound fields full of realism by arranging multiple

speakers around the listener.

VR format (Video Recording format)

A DVD video recording format, which allows editing

DVD video data recorded onto a disc. You need a VR

format compatible player for playback.

76 En

DVR-700

Input

Others ............................................................................................. USB: 1

Output

Video.....................................................................................Composite: 1

Component: 1

HDMI: 1

Others ........................................................................System Connector: 1

Dimensions (W x H x D)................................................ 360 x 68 x 224 mm

Weight ................................................................................................. 2.6 kg

NS-P700

Woofer.................................................................... 5.5 cm cone woofer x 2,

Magnetic shielding type

Tweeter........................................................2.5 cm Balanced dome tweeter,

Magnetic shielding type

Input Power (Nominal/Maximum)........................................... 40 W/100 W

Frequency Response............................................ 130 Hz – 20 kHz (-10 dB)

Dimensions (W x H x D)

Excluding stands ........................................................... 95 x 190 x 98 mm

Including stands/Upright position ............................... 95 x 206 x 106 mm

Including stands/Horizontal position ........................ 190 x 111 x 106 mm

Weight .................................................................. 1.2 kg (Excluding stands)

NS-PSW700

Type..................................................................................... Bass reflex type

16.5 cm cone, Magnetic shielding type

Frequency Response.............................................. 35 Hz – 130 Hz (-10 dB)

Dimensions (W x H x D).............................................. 194 x 450 x 400 mm

Weight .................................................................................................. 13 kg

Power Supply

[U.S.A. and Canada models].......................................... AC 120 V, 60 Hz

[Asia, Europe, Russia models]....................................... AC 230 V, 50 Hz

[Taiwan model] .............................................................. AC 110 V, 60 Hz

[Australia model] ........................................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz

Power Consumption ............................................................................. 50 W

Standby Power Consumption (reference data)....................... Less than 1 W

INPUT

Analog Audio ............................................................... Pin Jack: 1 (AUX)

Digital Audio..............................................................................Coaxial: 1

Optical: 2

DOCK: 1

(YDS-10, YDS-11, YBA-10)

FM Antenna terminal: 1

XM Tuner: 1 (U.S.A., and Canada model only)

Sirius Tuner: 1 (U.S.A., and Canada model only)

OUTPUT

Analog Audio .................................................................. SPEAKER OUT

Others ........................................................................System Connector: 1

Amplifier Section

Maximum Power

SP OUT......................................................70 W [6 Ω, 1 kHz, 10 %THD]

Subwoofer ................................................70 W [6 Ω, 100 Hz, 10 %THD]

Minimum RMS Output Power

SP OUT........................................................55 W [6 Ω, 1 kHz, 1 %THD]

Subwoofer ..................................................55 W [6 Ω, 100 Hz, 1 %THD]

Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance

AUX................................................................................... 350 mV/32 kΩ

Maximum Input Signal

AUX...............................................................≥ 2.2 V [1 kHz, DSP=Thru]

Frequency Response

SP OUT.......................................................................-2.0 ± 1dB [20Hz]

0dB [1kHz]

-0.5 ± 1dB [20kHz]

S / N Ratio

SP OUT.......................................... ≥ 82 dB [1 kHz, 18.5 V/6 Ω, Analog]

SP OUT........................................... ≥ 98 dB [1 kHz, 18.5 V/6 Ω, Digital]

[IHF-A Network]

Total Harmonic Distortion

SP OUT...........................≤ 0.06 % [1 kHz, Analog, Digital 20 kHz-LPF]

Residual Noise ............................................................... SP OUT: ≤ 138 uV

DVD Section

Video Output....................................................... Composite: 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)

Y Output/Component Video Output ..................Component: 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)

B Output/Component Video Output..............Component: 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω)

R Output/Component Video Output..............Component: 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω)

Tuner Section

FM Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models]........................................ 87.5 to 107.9 MHz

[Other models] ......................................................... 87.50 to 108.00 MHz

Radio Data System Function (Europe and Russian model only)

Other Section

SOUND FIELD................................... MOVIE, MUSIC, SPORTS, GAME

Surround mode

Night listening mode

Extended stereo

Compressed music enhancer

VIRTUAL SURROUND PROCESSOR ....... AIR SURROUND XTREME

AUDIO DECODE....................... Dolby Digital / Dolby Pro Logic II / DTS

Speakers distance mode .......................................... Wide / Normal /Narrow

Specifications are subject to change without prior notice.

SPECIFICATIONS

77 En

English

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

■ A

A-B repeat playback ............................ 30

AIR SURROUND XTREME .............. 43

Angle Indicator, Display menu ............ 41

angle selection ...................................... 29

ANGLE, remote control ...................... 10

ANTENNA terminal, subwoofer/system

control rear panel ............................... 8

AREA, remote control ......................... 10

AUDIO DELAY, remote control ........... 9

audio file playback ............................... 33

Audio language .................................... 25

Audio Language, Language menu .......40

AUDIO, remote control ....................... 10

AUTO indicator, front panel display ..... 7

Automatic station preset, FM ............... 47

■ B

battery insertion, remote control .......... 21

Bluetooth component listening ............ 61

brightness of front panel display .......... 64

Brightness, Video Adjust menu ........... 37

■ C

CH, remote control .............................. 10

Chroma Level, Video Adjust menu ..... 37

CLEAR, remote control ....................... 10

CODE SET, remote control ................. 10

Component Out, Video Output

menu ................................................ 38

COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT jacks,

DVD controller rear panel ................. 6

compressed music enhancer ................. 45

connecting DVD controller .................. 16

connecting external AV component .... 19

connecting FM antenna ........................ 18

connecting HDMI component ............. 18

connecting power cable ....................... 20

connecting speakers ............................. 14

connecting TV ...................................... 17

connection ............................................ 14

Contrast, Video Adjust menu ............... 37

Country Code, Parental Lock ............... 42

■ D

Decoder indicator, front panel display ... 7

Direct frequency tuning, FM ............... 47

disc ejection ......................................... 28

disc information displaying ................. 29

Disc loading slot, front panel ................. 5

disc menu ............................................. 28

Disc menu language ............................. 25

disc navigator ....................................... 32

disc playback ........................................ 26

DISP. MODE, remote control ................ 9

Display, Initial Setting menu ............... 41

displaying disc information ................. 29

distance between speakers setting ........ 44

DivX video playback ........................... 26

DivX VOD, Options menu .................. 42

DOCK indicator, front panel display .....7

DOCK terminal, subwoofer/system

control rear panel ...............................8

DOCK, remote control .........................10

DVD controller connection ..................16

DVD Menu Lang., Language menu .....40

DVD setup menu ..................................36

DVD/USB, remote control ...................10

■ E

EJECT, front panel .................................5

ejecting disc ..........................................28

ENHANCER indicator ...........................7

ENHANCER, remote control .................9

ENTER, remote control .......................10

extended stereo mode ...........................45

external AV component connection .....19

■ F

FM antenna connection ........................18

FM listening .........................................46

FM tuning operation .............................46

front panel display brightness ..............64

Front panel display, DVD controller ......7

Front panel display, front panel .............5

Front panel, DVD controller ..................5

FUNC./10KEY, remote control .............9

■ G

GAME, AIR SURROUND

XTREME .........................................43

GAME, remote control ...........................9

Gamma, Video Adjust menu ................37

■ H

HDMI Color, Video Output menu .......39

HDMI component connection ..............18

HDMI OUTPUT terminal, DVD

controller rear panel ...........................6

HDMI Resolution, Video Output

menu .................................................39

Hue, Video Adjust menu ......................37

■ I

Initial Setting menu ..............................38

initialization ..........................................65

INPUT 1 OPTICAL jack, subwoofer/

system control rear panel ...................8

INPUT 2 OPTICAL jack, subwoofer/

system control rear panel ...................8

INPUT 3 COAXIAL jack, subwoofer/

system control rear panel ...................8

INPUT 4 ANALOG jacks, subwoofer/

system control rear panel ...................8

Input selection buttons, remote

control ..............................................10

INPUT, front panel .................................5

INPUT, remote control .........................10

inserting batteries, remote control ........21

iPod content playback ..........................60

■ J

JPEG file slide show ............................ 34

■ L

language preference setting ................. 25

Language, Initial Setting menu ............ 40

Level Change, Parental Lock .............. 42

Lights up when compressed .................. 7

listening area shifting .......................... 44

■ M

Manual station preset, FM ................... 48

Manual tuning, FM .............................. 46

MEMORY indicator, front panel

display ............................................... 7

menu browse mode, iPod .................... 61

MENU, remote control ........................ 10

MOVIE, AIR SURROUND

XTREME ........................................ 43

MOVIE, remote control ......................... 9

MUSIC, AIR SURROUND

XTREME ........................................ 43

MUSIC, remote control ......................... 9

MUTE, remote control ........................ 10

■ N

NIGHT indicator, front panel display ... 7

NIGHT, remote control ......................... 9

Numeric keypad, remote control ........... 9

■ O

ON SCREEN, remote control ................ 9

On-screen display language ................. 25

Options, Initial Setting menu ............... 41

OSD language ...................................... 25

OSD Language, Display menu ............ 41

■ P

pairing to Bluetooth component .......... 62

Parental Lock, Options menu .............. 41

Password, Parental Lock ..................... 41

PBC ...................................................... 28

placing speakers ................................... 12

PLAY MODE, remote control ............ 10

playable disc .......................................... 2

playback control .................................. 28

playback controls ................................. 27

playing back audio file ........................ 33

playing disc .......................................... 26

playing DivX video ............................. 26

playing WMV file ................................ 26

POSITION, remote control ................. 10

power cable connection ....................... 20

Power cable, subwoofer/system control

rear panel ........................................... 8

Power indicator, front panel .................. 5

POWER, remote control ........................ 9

preset code, remote control .................. 66

preset station, FM ................................ 47

program playback ................................ 31

INDEX

78 En

■ R

random playback .................................. 30

Rear panel, subwoofer/system control ... 8

Recalling preset station, FM ................ 49

Remote control ....................................... 9

Remote control sensor, front panel ........ 5

remote control using ............................ 21

repeat playback .................................... 30

resuming playback ............................... 29

RETURN, remote control .................... 10

■ S

search mode ......................................... 31

SETUP, remote control ........................ 10

Sharpness, Video Adjust menu ............ 37

shifting listening area ........................... 44

simple remote mode, iPod ................... 60

SLEEP indicator, front panel display .... 7

sleep timer ............................................ 65

SLEEP, remote control .......................... 9

slide show of JPEG file ........................ 34

SOUND, remote control ...................... 10

soundtrack language changing ............. 28

speaker connection ............................... 14

speaker layout ...................................... 11

speaker placement ................................ 12

SPEAKER terminals, subwoofer/system

control rear panel ............................... 8

SPORTS, AIR SURROUND

XTREME ......................................... 43

SPORTS, remote control ....................... 9

STANDBY/ON, front panel .................. 5

STANDBY/ON, remote control ............ 9

station preset, FM ................................ 47

STEREO indicator, front panel

display ................................................ 7

STEREO, remote control ....................... 9

Subtitle Display, Language menu ........ 40

Subtitle language .................................. 25

subtitle language changing ................... 29

Subtitle Language, Language menu ..... 40

SUBTITLE, remote control ................. 10

supplied accessory ................................. 4

SYSTEM CONNECTOR terminal, DVD

controller rear panel ........................... 6

SYSTEM CONNECTOR terminal,

subwoofer/system control rear

panel .................................................. 8

system menu ........................................ 65

■ T

TEST, remote control .......................... 10

TUNED indicator, front panel display ... 7

TUNER, remote control ....................... 10

tuning operation, FM ........................... 46

Turning on ............................................ 22

TV connection ...................................... 17

TV display setting ................................ 23

TV INPUT, remote control .................. 10

TV Screen, Video Output menu .......... 38

TV VOL, remote control ..................... 10

■ U

USB device using ................................. 35

USB terminal, front panel ......................5

■ V

Video Adjust menu ..............................37

video input/output setting .....................23

VIDEO OUTPUT jack, DVD controller

rear panel ............................................6

Video Output, Initial Setting menu ......38

virtual surround effect checking ..........45

VOLUME, front panel ...........................5

VOLUME, remote control ...................10

■ W

WMV file playback ..............................26

■ Z

ZOOM, remote control ..........................9

zooming in ............................................29

APPENDIX

LIST OF PRESET CODES

LISTE DES CODES PRÉDÉFINIS

Brand name Preset code

Yamaha 299, 292, 242, 285, 287,

253, 206

Admiral 292, 293, 216

Aiwa 294, 276, 283, 284

Akai 295, 296

Alba 296

AOC 297

Bell & Howell 292

Bester 298

Blaupunkt 229, 222

Blue sky 298

Brandt 223

Brocsonic 297

Bush 296

By Design 201, 202

Clatronic 298

Craig 224

Croslex 225, 298

Curtis Mathis 297, 226

Daewoo 297, 298, 224, 227, 228,

215, 289

Daytron 239

Dual 298

Dwin 293, 281

Electrograph 289

Emerson 297, 224, 239, 232

Ferguson 223, 265, 266

First line 298

Fisher 295, 233

Fraba 298

Fujitsu 290

Funai 277, 278

Gateway 215, 289

GE 293, 297, 234, 235, 236

Goodmans 296, 298, 223

Grundig 229, 238, 249

Hitachi 297, 239, 242, 243, 285,

206

ICE 296

Irradio 296

Itt/Nokia 244, 245

JC Penny 293, 297, 234, 237, 240

JVC 296, 246, 247, 286

Kendo 298

KTV 297, 239

LG/Goldstar 297, 298, 239, 237, 240

Loewe 298, 248, 207

LXI 293, 297, 225, 226, 233,

298

Magnavox 297, 225, 239, 298

Marantz 298, 210

Matsui 295

Medion 203, 204, 298

Memorex 297, 216

Mitsubishi 299, 297, 259, 287

Nad 226, 255

NEC 297, 252, 282

Nokia 244, 245

Nokia Oceanic 245

Nordmende 265, 266

Onwa 296

Panasonic 234, 235, 236, 253, 288

Philco 297, 225, 239, 298

Philips 225, 205, 298

Pioneer 226, 235, 254, 255

Portland 297, 256

Proscan 293, 221, 231, 241, 251

Proton 297, 250, 260, 270

Quasar 234, 235

Radio Shack 299, 293, 297

RCA 293, 297, 234, 256, 257,

258, 221

Runco 220, 230, 271

SABA 223, 269, 265, 266

Sampo 281, 297, 280

Samsung 297, 239, 248, 262, 275

Sanyo 295, 233, 279, 272, 273,

274, 212

Schneider 296

Scott 297

Sharp 292, 239, 232, 208

Siemens 229

Signature 216, 292

Sony 263, 214

Sylvania 297, 225, 298

Symphonic 217, 218, 219, 291

Tatung 215

Telefunken 269, 264, 265, 266

Thomson 223, 266

Toshiba 292, 226, 267

V 209, 211, 215, 289

Videch 297, 242

Viewsonic 209, 211, 289

VIZIO 209, 211, 213, 215, 268,

289

Wards 297, 239, 232, 216

Westinghouse 211

Yama j i 298

Zenith 216, 261, 271

Brand name Preset code

CABLE

Brand name Preset code

ABC 739, 752, 753, 755, 758,

759, 762

General

Instrument

722, 786, 787, 788

Hamlin 723, 724, 725, 726, 727

Hitachi 722

Jerrold 722, 728, 729, 732, 733,

734, 735, 736, 737

Magnavox 738

Motorola 748, 728

Oak 739, 742, 743

Panasonic 744, 745, 746, 747, 783,

784

Philips 763, 764, 765, 766, 767,

768

Pioneer 748, 785, 747

Radio Shack 749

RCA 744, 792, 793

Scientific Atlanta 752, 753, 754, 789

Sony 756, 757

Tocom 755

Universal 769, 772, 773, 774, 775

Viewstar 764, 766, 776, 777, 778,

779, 782

DBS

Brand name Preset code

Bell expressvu 822, 855

DirecTV 825, 832, 842, 843, 846,

848, 849, 856, 857, 858,

859, 862, 863, 864, 865,

866

Dish Network

system

822, 854, 855

Dishpro 822, 854

Echostar 822, 854, 855

Expressvu 822

GE 837, 838, 839, 857, 858

General

Instrument

823

Goi 822

Hitachi 824

Houston 822

HTS 822

Hughes 843, 844, 845, 846

JVC 822, 855

Magnavox 825

Panasonic 826, 829

Philips 825, 843, 844, 845, 846,

847, 848, 849, 822

Primestar 827

Proscan 837, 838, 839, 842

Radio Shack 828, 822

RCA 837, 838, 839, 842, 822

Samsung 852

SKY + 853

SKY HD 853

Sony 832, 835

Toshiba 833, 836

Uniden 825

Zenith 834

LIST OF COUNTRY CODES

LISTE DES CODES DE PAYS

Country/region Country code

Argentina ar 0118

Australia au 0121

Austria at 0120

Belgium be 0205

Brazil br 0218

Britain gb 0702

Canada ca 0301

Chile cl 0312

China cn 0314

Denmark dk 0411

Finland fi 0609

France fr 0618

Germany de 0405

Hong Kong hk 0811

India in 0914

Indonesia id 0904

Italy es 0920

Japan jp 1016

Korea kr 1118

Malaysia my 1325

Mexico mx 1324

Netherlands nl 1412

New Zealand nz 1426

Norway no 1415

Pakistan pk 1611

Philippines ph 1608

Portugal pt 1620

Russia ru 1821

Singapore sg 1907

Spain es 0519

Sweden se 1905

Switzerland ch 0308

Taiwan tw 2023

Thailand th 2008

U.S.A. us 2119

iii

LIST OF LANGUAGE CODES

LISTE DE CODES DE LANGUES

Language Lanruage code

Abkhazian ab 0102

Afar aa 0101

Afrikaans af 0106

Albanian sq 1917

Amharic am 0113

Arabic ar 0118

Armenian hy 0821

Assamese as 0119

Aymara ay 0125

Azerbaijani az 0126

Bashkir ba 0201

Basque eu 0521

Bengali bn 0214

Bhutani dz 0426

Bihari bh 0208

Bislama bi 0209

Breton br 0218

Bulgarian bg 0207

Burmese my 1325

Byelorussian be 0205

Cambodian km 1113

Catalan ca 0301

Chinese zh 2608

Corsican co 0315

Croatian hr 0818

Czech cs 0319

Danish da 0401

Dutch nl 1412

English en 0514

Esperanto eo 0515

Estonian et 0520

Faroese fo 0615

Fiji fi 0609

Finnish fi 0609

French fr 0618

Frisian fy 0625

Galician gl 0712

Georgian ka 1101

German de 0405

Greek el 0512

Greenlandic kl 1112

Guarani gn 0714

Gujarati gu 0721

Hausa ha 0801

Hebrew iw 0923

Hindi hi 0809

Hungarian hu 0821

Icelandic is 0919

Indonesian in 0914

Interlingua ia 0901

Interlingue ie 0905

Inupiak ik 0911

Irish ga 0701

Italian it 0920

Japanese ja 1001

Javanese jw 1023

Kannada kn 1114

Kashmiri ks 1119

Kazakh kk 1111

Kinyarwanda rw 1823

Kirghiz ky 1125

Kirundi rn 1814

Korean ko 1115

Kurdish ku 1121

Laotian lo 1215

Latin la 1201

Latvian lv 1222

Lingala ln 1214

Lithuanian lt 1220

Macedonian mk 1311

Malagasy mg 1307

Malayalam ml 1312

Maori mi 1309

Marathi mt 1320

Moldavian mo 1315

Mongolian mn 1314

Nauru na 1401

Nepali ne 1405

Norwegian no 1415

Occitan oc 1503

Oriya or 1518

Oromo om 1513

Panjabi pa 1601

Pashto, Pushto ps 1619

Persian fa 0601

Polish pl 1612

Portuguese pt 1620

Quechua qu 1721

Rhaeto-Romance rm 1813

Romanian ro 1815

Russian ru 1821

Samoan sm 1913

Sangho sg 1907

Sanskrit sa 1901

Scots-Gaelic gd 0704

Serbian sr 1918

Serbo-Croatian sh 1908

Sesotho st 1920

Setswana tn 2014

Shona sn 1914

Sindhi sd 1904

Sinhalese si 1909

Siswati ss 1919

Slovak sk 1911

Slovenian sl 1912

Somali so 1915

Language Lanruage code

Spanish es 0519

Sudanese su 1921

Swahili sw 1923

Swedish sv 1922

Tagalog tl 2012

Tajik tg 2007

Tamil ta 2001

Tatar tt 2020

Telugu te 2005

Thai th 2008

Tibetan bo 0215

Tigrinya ti 2009

Tonga to 2015

Tsonga ts 2019

Turkish tr 2018

Turkmen tk 2011

Twi tw 2023

Ukrainian uk 2111

Urdu ur 2118

Uzbek uz 2126

Vietnamese vi 2209

Vo l a p ü k v o 2 2 1 5

Welsh cy 0325

Wolof wo 23 15

Xhosa xh 2408

Yiddish ji 1009

Yoruba yo 2515

Zulu zu 2621

Language Lanruage code

OWNER’S MANUAL

MODE D’EMPLOI

DVX-700

(DVR-700 + NS-PSW700 + NS-P700)

DVD HOME THEATER SYSTEM

SYSTEME HOME CINEMA AVEC LECTUER DVD

DVX-700

Printed in China WQ33520

LASER INFORMATION

INFORMATION LASER

● The name plate is located on the rear panel of the DVD

controller.

● La plaque signalétique se trouve sur le panneau arrière du

lecteur de DVD.

Without top cover

Sans couvercle supérieur

Documenttranscriptie

UC LASER INFORMATION INFORMATION LASER ● The name plate is located on the rear panel of the DVD controller. Without top cover Sans couvercle supérieur DVX-700 ● La plaque signalétique se trouve sur le panneau arrière du lecteur de DVD. DVD HOME THEATER SYSTEM SYSTEME HOME CINEMA AVEC LECTUER DVD DVX-700 (DVR-700 + NS-PSW700 + NS-P700) OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI © 2008 All rights reserved. Printed in China WQ33520 IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 • Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. Note to CATV system installer: This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. 10 11 12 13 14 Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water. Clean only with dry cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. FCC INFORMATION (for US customers) 1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Caution-i En Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. Caution: read this before operating your unit. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place — way from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least 5 cm on the top, left, right, and the back of this unit. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, nor locate this unit in an environment with high humidity (i.e., a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 Avoid installing this unit in a location where foreign objects may fall onto this unit or where this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e., candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall, spilling the liquid and causing an electrical shock to the user and/ or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use excessive force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Use only the voltage specified on this unit. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than as specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord out and outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit during a lightning storm. 14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reason. 15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e., vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 16 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set the unit in standby mode, then disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 18 Condensation will form when the surrounding temperature changes suddenly. Disconnect the power cable from the outlet, then leave the unit alone. 19 When using the unit for a long time, the unit may become warm. Turn the power off, then leave the unit alone for cooling. 20 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power plug can be reached easily. 21 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or like. 22 Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can cause hearing loss. 23 When replacing the batteries, be sure to use batteries of the same type. Danger of explosion may happen if batteries are incorrectly replaced. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. Laser component in this product is capable of emitting radiation exceeding the limit for Class 1. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type. FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. MODEL: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. Caution-ii En LASER SAFETY This unit employs a laser. Due to possible eye injury, only a qualified service person should remove the cover or attempt to service this device. DANGER This unit emits visible laser radiation when open. Avoid direct eye exposure to beam. When this unit is plugged into a wall outlet, do not place your eyes close to the opening of the disc loader and other openings or look inside. LASER Type Wave length Output Power Beam divergence Semiconductor laser ALGaInP 655nm (DVD) 790nm (VCD/CD) 5/7mW (DVD/VCD,CD) 20degrees CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Caution-iii En CONTENTS 1 INITIAL SETTINGS MENU ................................ 38 1. INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION.................................................. 2 Main unit......................................................................... 4 Supplied accessories ....................................................... 4 Video Output................................................................. 38 Language....................................................................... 40 Display .......................................................................... 41 Options .......................................................................... 41 FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW.................................. 5 Front panel (DVR-700) .................................................. Rear panel (DVR-700).................................................... Front panel display (DVR-700)...................................... Rear panel (NS-PSW700)............................................... Remote control ............................................................... 5 6 7 8 9 6. OTHER FUNCTIONS Roles and layout of the speakers .................................. 11 Placing the speakers using the stands ........................... 12 Placing the speakers on a wall...................................... 12 SYSTEM CONNECTIONS ................................. 14 LISTENING TO FM BROADCASTS.................. 46 Connecting the speakers ............................................... 14 Connecting the DVD controller and the subwoofer/system control ...................................................................... 16 Basic tuning operation .................................................. 46 Using station preset feature........................................... 47 Recalling the preset stations.......................................... 49 OTHER CONNECTIONS ................................... 17 LISTENING TO XM® SATELLITE RADIO BROADCASTS .............................................. 50 CONNECTIONS................................................. 11 Connecting a TV........................................................... Connecting an HDMI component................................. Connecting the FM antenna.......................................... Connecting external AV components........................... Connecting the power cable ......................................... 17 18 18 19 20 3. PREPARATION GETTING STARTED ......................................... 21 Inserting batteries into the remote control.................... Using the remote control .............................................. Turn on the system ....................................................... Setting the video input/output....................................... Setting language preferences ........................................ 21 21 22 23 25 4. BASIC OPERATIONS 26 27 28 28 28 28 29 29 29 29 29 30 32 PLAYING OTHER DISCS.................................. 33 To play back audio files................................................ To start a slide show of JPEG files............................... Selecting a file to play back.......................................... Using a USB device...................................................... Connecting XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock..................... 50 Activating XM Satellite Radio...................................... 50 Basic XM Satellite Radio operations ............................ 51 Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset channels............ 52 Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information ........... 53 4 5 6 7 8 LISTENING TO SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO™ BROADCASTS .............................................. 54 Connecting the SiriusConnect™ tuner.......................... 54 Activating SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ subscription ....... 55 Basic SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ operations.................. 55 Setting the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ preset channels.. 57 Setting the Parental Lock .............................................. 58 Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ information ............................................................... 59 USING OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT ...................... 60 DISC OPERATION ............................................ 26 Playing discs ................................................................. Basic playback controls ................................................ Ejecting a disc............................................................... Using the disc menu (DVD only) ................................. Playback control (PBC) (Video CD only).................... Changing soundtrack language..................................... Changing subtitle language .......................................... Resuming playback from the last stopped point........... Viewing from another angle ......................................... Displaying disc information ......................................... Zooming in ................................................................... Advanced operation...................................................... Disc navigator............................................................... 3 AIR SURROUND XTREME................................ 43 What is AIR SURROUND XTREME? ........................ 43 Listening to surround mode of AIR SURROUND XTREME.................................................................. 43 Shifting the optimum listening area from side to side .. 44 Selecting the optimum distance between the speakers .................................................................... 44 Checking the virtual surround effect............................. 45 Using extended stereo mode ......................................... 45 Setting compressed music enhancer ............................. 45 2. CONNECTIONS 2 33 34 34 35 DVD SETUP MENU OPTIONS .......................... 36 Menu overview ............................................................. 36 VIDEO ADJUST MENU ..................................... 37 7. USEFUL OPERATION USEFUL OPERATION....................................... 63 Adjusting the audio delay ............................................. 63 Listening at low volume (night listening mode) ........... 63 Adjusting the audio balance for the playback ............... 64 Changing the brightness of the front panel display....... 64 Setting the sleep timer................................................... 65 System menu ................................................................. 65 Setting the preset code .................................................. 66 8. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................... GLOSSARY ....................................................... SPECIFICATIONS ............................................. INDEX................................................................. 67 74 76 77 APPENDIX LIST OF PRESET CODES.............................................. i LIST OF COUNTRY CODES....................................... ii LIST OF LANGUAGE CODES................................... iii 1 En English 5. DVD SETUP MENU Using iPod™................................................................. 60 Using Bluetooth™ components .................................... 61 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing this unit. This Owner’s Manual explains the basic operation of this unit. Notes about discs – This DVD controller is designed for use with the following discs. DVD disc: DVD-Video, DVD-R/-RW/-R DL, DVD+R/+RW/+R DL Compact Disc: Audio CD, CD-R, CD-RW, Video CD, Super Video CD Notes – DVD-R/-RW/-R DL and DVD+R/+RW/+R DL discs recorded in DVD-Video compatible format. – DVD-R/-RW/-R DL discs recorded in VR format (compatible with CPRM). – CD-R/RW, DVD-R/-RW/-R DL and DVD+R/ +RW/+R DL cannot be played unless finalized. – Multi-session discs are not supported. – Some discs recorded on PC cannot be played depending on the settings of the application software. – Discs recorded on PC in packet write format are not compatible with this DVD controller. – This unit is not compatible with 8-cm discs. – Plays all versions of DivX® video (including DivX® 6) with enhanced playback of DivX® media files and the DivX® Media Format. Hint Refer to “DISC OPERATION” on page 26 for details. Cleaning discs – When a disc becomes dirty, clean it with a cleaning cloth. Wipe the disc from the center out. Do not wipe in a circular motion. – Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, commercially available cleaners, or antistatic spray intended for analog records. Avoid high temperatures, moisture, water and dust – Do not expose the system, batteries or discs to humidity, rain, sand or excessive heat (caused by heating equipment or direct sunlight). Avoid condensation problem – The lens may cloud over when the controller is suddenly moved from cold to warm surroundings, making it impossible to play a disc. Leave the controller in the warm environment until the moisture evaporates. Disc care – Write only on the printed side of a CD-R/RW, DVD-R/-RW/-R DL, DVD+R/+RW/+R DL and only with a soft felt tipped pen. – Handle the disc by its edge; do not touch the surface. This controller can play the following formatted files recorded on CD-R/RW, DVD-R/-RW, DVD+R/+RW and USB device. Compressed audio file – MPEG1 audio layer3 (MP3) – Windows Media Audio (WMA) – MPEG-4 AAC Still – – – image file JPEG FUJICOLOR CD KODAK Picture CD Movie file (except files saved on USB devices) – WMV – DivX® Ultra – Official DivX® Ultra Certified product. 2 En Lens care – Basically, lens cleaning is not necessary. – Do not use lens cleaner because it may cause malfunction. Cabinet care – Use a soft cloth slightly moistened with a mild detergent solution. Do not use a solution containing alcohol, spirits, ammonia, or abrasives. Choosing a suitable location – Place the controller on a flat, hard, and stable surface. INTRODUCTION Destination Region code of DVR-700 Features Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “MLP Lossless” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. “DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc. Playable discs U.S.A., and Canada model 1 1 ALL Europe model 2 2 ALL Asia and Taiwan models 3 3 ALL Australia model 4 4 ALL Russia model 5 5 ALL 1 INTRODUCTION Region codes The unit is designed to support the Region Management System. Check the region code number on the disc package. If the number does not match the unit’s region number (Refer to the table below or the back of the unit), the unit may be unable to play the disc. DivX®, DivX® Ultra Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of DivX®, Inc. and are used under license. HDMI, the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. The XM name and related logos are registered trademarks of XM Satellite Radio Inc. ©2006 SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc. “SIRIUS”, “SiriusConnect”, the SIRIUS dog logo, channel names and logos are trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc. “Apple”, “iPod”, and “iTunes” are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG and is used by Yamaha in accordance with a license agreement. Windows Media is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. 3 En English This system employs new technologies and algorithms that make it possible to achieve 7-channel surround sound with only two speakers, and without using wall reflections. INTRODUCTION ■ Main unit ■ Supplied accessories Indoor FM antenna DVD controller (DVR-700) (U.S.A., Canada, Asia and Taiwan models) Speaker package Remote control (Europe, Russia and Australia models) DVX-700 WP87010 STANDBY/ON TV FUNC. MOVIE MUSIC Speaker (L/R) (NS-P700) POWER STB 10KEY SPORTS STEREO ENHANCER NIGHT ON GAME SLEEP DISP. MODE AUDIO DELAY ZOOM ON SCREEN BLUETOOTH OFF AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE PLAY MODE CLEAR LOCK SRCH MODE TOP MENU AUTO/ MANUAL MEMORY MENU PRESET/CH INFO. A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. ENTER SETUP RETURN CODE SET TV/ STB CH TV VOL TV INPUT DVD/ USB POSITION VOLUME TUNER MUTE INPUT 1-4 DOCK AREA SOUND TEST Battery x 2 (AA, R6, UM-3) Subwoofer/system control (NS-PSW700) Video pin cable (1.5 m) System control cable (4 m) Speaker cable x 2 (4 m) Cover (For NS-PSW700) Screw x 6 (for cover 3 x 6 mm) Stand x 2 (For NS-P700) Screw x 2 (for stand 4 x 10 mm) U Owner’s Manual DVD HOME THEATER SYSTEM SYSTEME HOME CINEMA AVEC LECTUER DVD DVX-700 (DVR-700 + NS-PSW700 + NS-P700) OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI 4 En 1 FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW INTRODUCTION ■ Front panel (DVR-700) 1 2 3 STANDBY / ON 4 5 6 EJECT 7 8 INPUT USB 9 0 1 STANDBY/ON Turns on the system, or sets it to standby mode (Page 22). 2 Disc loading slot Insert a disc to be played. 3 EJECT Ejects a disc in the DVD controller. 4 s Stops playback. 5 e Pauses playback. 6 h Starts playback. A B 7 INPUT Selects an input source by pressing repeatedly. 8 VOLUME u / d Adjusts the volume level. 9 Remote control sensor Point the remote control towards this sensor. 0 Power indicator Lights up when system is on. A Front panel display Shows information about the operational status of the unit. B USB terminal Connect to the USB connector of your USB device (Page 35). English 5 En FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW ■ Rear panel (DVR-700) 1 2 NS-PSW700 SYSTEM CONNECTOR Y 3 4 VIDEO PB PR COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT HDMI OUTPUT 1 SYSTEM CONNECTOR terminal Connect to the subwoofer/system control (Page 16). 2 COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT jacks Connect to the Y PB/CB PR/CR jacks on your TV (Page 17). 3 VIDEO OUTPUT jack Connect to the video (composite) jack on your TV (Page 17). 4 HDMI OUTPUT terminal Connect to the HDMI input terminal on your TV (Page 18). 6 En FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW ■ Front panel display (DVR-700) 2 3 4 5 9 1 Decoder indicators The respective indicator lights up when any of the decoders of the system is functioning. 2 DOCK indicator – Lights up when the system is receiving a signal from an iPod stationed in the Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 or YDS-11, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of the subwoofer/system control (Page 20). – Lights up while the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately) is connected to the Bluetooth component (Page 61). – Flashes while the connected Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately) and the Bluetooth component are pairing or while the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver is searching for the Bluetooth component (Page 61). 3 ENHANCER indicator Lights up when compressed music enhancer mode is selected (Page 45). 4 NIGHT indicator Lights up when you select night listening mode (Page 63). 5 SLEEP indicator Lights up when sleep mode is on (Page 65). 6 7 INTRODUCTION 1 1 8 @ 6 Tuner indicators (AUTO/TUNED/STEREO/ MEMORY/HOLD) AUTO indicator Lights up when the system is in automatic tuning mode (Page 46). TUNED indicator Lights up when the system is receiving a station (Page 46). STEREO indicator Lights up when the system is receiving a strong signal from an FM stereo broadcast in automatic tuning mode (Page 46). MEMORY indicator Flashes to show a station can be stored (Page 47). HOLD Indicator Flashes while holding the XM/SIRIUS information (Page 53, 59). 7 XM indicator Lights up when the input source is XM Mini-Tuner (Page 50). 8 SIRIUS indicator Lights up when the input source is SiriusConnect tuner (Page 54). 9 Multi information display Shows the playing time. When you adjust or change a setting, the value is displayed. English 0 MUTE indicator/VOLUME indicator – Flashes while the mute function is activated. – Indicates the current volume level. 7 En FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW ■ Rear panel (NS-PSW700) ANTENNA FM 75 UNBAL. 1 INPUT 2 OPTICAL OPTICAL 3 4 COAXIAL ANALOG 5 DOCK SIRIUS 6 7 XM 8 SYSTEM CONNECTOR DVR-700 9 SPEAKERS SPEAKER IMPEDANCE : 6 MIN. MAINS @ 1 ANTENNA terminal Connect the FM antenna. 2 INPUT 1/2 OPTICAL jacks Connect to the DIGITAL OUT jack (Optical Type) on your digital audio component. These input jacks support PCM, Dolby Digital, and DTS bitstream. 3 INPUT 3 COAXIAL jack Connect to the DIGITAL OUT jack (Coaxial Type) on your digital audio component. This input jack support PCM, Dolby Digital, and DTS bitstream. 4 INPUT 4 ANALOG jacks Connect to the ANALOG OUT jack if the component does not have DIGITAL OUT jacks. 5 DOCK terminal Connect the Yamaha iPod Universal Dock (such as YDS-10 or YDS-11, sold separately) or Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately) (Page 20). 6 SIRIUS terminal Connect to a SiriusConnect tuner (sold separately). 7 XM terminal Connect to an XM Mini-Tuner and XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock (sold separately). 8 SYSTEM CONNECTOR terminal Connect to the DVD controller. 9 SPEAKER terminals Connect to the speakers. 0 Power cable Connect to a standard AC outlet. 8 En FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW ■ Remote control 3 POWER Turns on the TV. 4 MOVIE TV STB FUNC. 10KEY MUSIC 3 SPORTS GAME NIGHT SLEEP STEREO ENHANCER DISP. MODE AUDIO DELAY ZOOM 5 6 8 9 A B D E G I ON SUBTITLE PLAY MODE CLEAR 0 TOP MENU MEMORY MENU PRESET/CH MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME F H INFO. A-E/CAT. RETURN CODE SET TV/ STB M TV VOL TV INPUT DVD/ USB POSITION VOLUME TUNER MUTE INPUT 1-4 DOCK AREA – Turns extended stereo mode on and off alternately (Page 45). – Turns surround mode off (Page 43). ENHANCER Turns compressed music enhancer mode on and off alternately (Page 45). NIGHT Turns night listening mode on and off alternately (Page 63). SLEEP Sets the sleep timer (Page 65). DISP. MODE Changes the brightness of the front panel display (Page 64). AUDIO DELAY Delays the output sound to synchronize it with the video image (Page 63). ZOOM Enlarges the pictures while playing DVD. J L N CH SOUND TEST O t S 1 STANDBY/ON ( ) Turns on the this system, or sets it to the standby mode. 2 FUNC./10KEY Switches the operation of the Function/Numeric keypad keys. Also, the preset code to operate TV or STB. Select surround mode. STEREO A-E/CAT. ENTER SETUP Q R 7 C AUTO/ MANUAL K P ANGLE LOCK SRCH MODE 4 Function / Numeric keypad 0-9 Operates some functions, such as AIR SURROUND XTREME, and enters track numbers or other numbers. The available operation will be changed depending on the FUNC./10KEY position. FUNC./10KEY: FUNC. side ON SCREEN BLUETOOTH OFF AUDIO To operate your TV with the remote control, you need to set the preset code. Refer to “Setting the preset code” on page 66. POWER INTRODUCTION Note DVX-700 WP87010 STANDBY/ON 1 2 1 Hint This button can be used regardless of the FUNC./10KEY position. ON SCREEN Displays the disc information on the TV display. Hint Using the remote control, you can operate two kinds of peripheral devices such as TV and satellite tuner. When operating them, you need to set the preset codes depending on the components. Refer to “Setting the preset code” on page 66. This button can be used regardless of the FUNC./10KEY position. FUNC./10KEY: 10KEY side Enters numeric characters using 0 to 9 buttons. 9 En English Hint FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW 5 AUDIO Selects an audio language for the DVD that is playing (if available). 6 SUBTITLE Selects a subtitle language for the DVD that is playing (if available). 7 ANGLE Selects a camera angle for the DVD that is playing (if available). 8 PLAY MODE Displays the Play Mode menu. 9 s Stops playback. 0 CLEAR Erases the registered track/chapter order. A w (LOCK) Rewinds the disc. SIRIUS: Sets a parental lock. B e Pauses playback. C f Fast-forwards the disc. D b (SRCH MODE) Selects the previous track or chapter. XM/SIRIUS: Selects the search mode. E h (AUTO/MANUAL) Starts playback. FM: selects auto/manual tuning (Page 46). F a (MEMORY) Selects the next track or chapter. FM: registers the radio frequency. G TOP MENU (INFO.) Displays the top-level disc menu. iPod: switches operation mode of the iPod. H MENU Displays the disc contents menu. I Cursors ( / / / ) Selects items or changes values in the menu screen. – Tuning the FM station. – Controlling an iPod. – Changing the settings. J ENTER Confirms a selection. K SETUP Displays the DVD setup menu. L RETURN (CODE SET) 10 En – Returns to the previous screen when DVD setup menu is displayed. – Use to set the preset code. Refer to “Setting the preset code” on page 66. M TV/STB control buttons TV VOL +/– Adjusts the TV volume level. CH +/– Select the TV channel. TV INPUT Selects the TV input. Note To operate your TV with the remote control, you need to set the preset code. Refer to “Setting the preset code” on page 66. You can select TV or STB by switching FUNC./ 10KEY. N VOLUME +/– Adjusts the volume level of DVX-700. O MUTE Mutes the volume of DVX-700. Press the button again to mute OFF. P Input selection buttons DVD/USB Switches the input source to DVD or USB. Each time you press the button, the input source changes in sequence. TUNER Switches the input source to FM/XM/SIRIUS. INPUT 1-4 Switches the input source to the external input. Each time you press the button, the input source changes in sequence from input 1 to input 4. DOCK Switches the input source to DOCK. Selects iPod or Bluetooth as the input source depending on the option connected to the Dock terminal. Q POSITION Shifts the optimum listening area according to your listening position (Page 44). R AREA Sets the distance between speakers for the best surround effect (Page 44). S SOUND Adjusts the volume balance for the virtual speaker and subwoofer (Page 64). T TEST Outputs the test tone (Page 45). CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS ■ Roles and layout of the speakers 2 When placing the speakers on a rack 1 1 When placing the speakers on a wall 1 1 DVD controller 2 DVD controller CONNECTIONS To enjoy quality sounds, you need to place the speakers in their appropriate positions and install them correctly. The following shows the recommended layout of the speakers. 2 1 Speaker (L, R) Produces front channel (stereo) sounds. Also produces virtual center channel sounds (dialogue, etc.) and virtual surround channel sounds effectively using the Yamaha front surround system. Place the left and right speakers at equal distances away from the listening position so that you can produce high quality surround sound. You can install the speakers on a rack using the stands or on a wall. 2 Subwoofer/system control The subwoofer produces bass sounds and LFE sounds contained in Dolby Digital or DTS. Place the subwoofer in the front of the listening position. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections. Notes – To avoid magnetic interference, do not position the speakers too close to your TV. – Allow adequate ventilation around the DVD controller and subwoofer/system control. – Bass sounds produced by the subwoofer may be heard differently depending on the listening position and subwoofer location. To enjoy desired sounds, try to change the location of the subwoofer according to the listening position. – You can adjust the surround effect by arranging the position of the speakers (Page 46). English 11 En CONNECTIONS ■ Placing the speakers using the stands You can place the speakers in an upright position or a horizontal position. Put the speakers on the stands and secure them with the screws. When placing the speaker in an upright position ■ Placing the speakers on a wall Put the speakers on a wall using commercially available screws. Refer to the illustration below for the screw size. Tapping screw (Available at the hardware store) Dia.4 mm (1/8") Installing on a plaster wall. Min 20 mm (3/4") 5 mm (1/4") Installing on a firm wall. Min 20 mm 5 mm (3/4") (1/4") Place the speaker on the stand vertically, and then secure it with the screw as shown in the illustration. Pillar Plaster or lumber Pillar or lumber 1 When placing the speakers on a wall, remove the stands. 2 Install screws on a wall as shown in the illustration. The distance between the screws: 126 mm for both sides 126 mm (5") When placing the speakers in a horizontal position 126 mm (5") Put the speaker on the stand so that the black side of the speaker becomes outside, and then secure it with the screw as shown in the illustration. 3 Insert the screws into the holes on the back of the speaker. Notes – To attach the speaker to a wall with screws, the wall must be firm. If not you may cause the speaker to fall. 12 En CONNECTIONS – Use commercially available screws that can support the weight of the installation. – Make sure you use specified screws to attach the speakers to a wall. Using clamps other than specified screws, such as short screws, nails, or two-sided tape, may cause the speaker to fall. – After attaching the speakers, check that the speakers are installed securely. Yamaha will bear no responsibility for any accidents caused by improper installations. 2 CONNECTIONS English 13 En SYSTEM CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting the speakers Note Do not connect the power cable of the subwoofer/system control into an AC outlet until all cable connections are completed. DVD controller NS-PSW700 SYSTEM CONNECTOR Y VIDEO PB PR Subwoofer/system control COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT HDMI OUTPUT SYSTEM CONNECTOR DVR-700 SPEAKERS SPEAKER IMPEDANCE : 6 MIN. MAINS Speaker (R) 14 En Speaker (L) SYSTEM CONNECTIONS Connecting the subwoofer/system control Connecting the speakers and subwoofer/system control 1 Insert the speaker cable plug until you hear a click sound. Connecting the speakers Confirm the plug colors of the speaker cables. – Speaker cable with white plug: for speaker (L) – Speaker cable with red plug: for speaker (R) from speaker (L) for speaker (L): White plug CONNECTIONS for speaker (R): Red plug 2 SYSTEM CONNECTOR DVR-700 SPEAKERS from speaker (R) 1 Push down the knob of the speaker terminal. SPEAKER IMPEDANCE : 6 MIN. MAINS Note 2 Insert the stripped speaker cable into the hole on the speaker terminal. Make sure that the cable plugs are connected to the subwoofer/system control terminals of the same color. 2 Use the same procedure to connect the other speaker cable. Red tube Note Connect the cable with red tube to the positive terminal, and the other cable to the negative terminal. 3 Release the knob of the speaker terminal. English 15 En SYSTEM CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting the DVD controller and the subwoofer/system control Connect the SYSTEM CONNECTOR terminal at the rear of the subwoofer/system control to the SYSTEM CONNECTOR terminal at the rear of the DVD controller using the system control cable. 00 W7 -PS NS NS-PSW700 SYSTEM CONNECTOR Y VIDE PB COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT Tighten the screws. Tighten the screws. SYSTEM CONNECTOR DVR-700 SYSTEM TOR EC CONN DV SPEAKERS SPEAKER IMPEDANCE : 6 MIN. MAINS Notes – Make sure that the system control cable is correctly connected. Improper connections may damage the system due to a short-circuit. – To prevent unwanted noise, do not place the subwoofer too close to the DVD controller, AC power adaptor, TV or other sources of radiation. – Do not insert the Power cable to an AC outlet until all connections are completed. 16 En OTHER CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting a TV Notes – You only need to make one video connection from the following options (A or B), depending on the capabilities of your TV. – Do not connect the power cables until all cable connections are completed. TV Use the component video cables (Green/Blue/Red, not supplied) to connect the DVD controller’s Y PB PR jacks to the corresponding component video input jacks (or the Y PB/CB PR/CR YUV jacks) on your TV. Progressive scan video quality is only available when using Y PB PR in conjunction with a progressive scan TV. To activate the progressive scan function, refer to “Selecting the output type for COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT jacks” on page 24. 2 CONNECTIONS COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT jacks <A> VIDEO OUTPUT jack <B> Use the Video pin cable (yellow-supplied) to connect the DVD controller’s VIDEO OUTPUT jack to the video input jack (or A/V In/Video In/Composite/Baseband jack) on your TV. <A> <B> NS-PSW700 SYSTEM CONNECTOR Y VIDEO PB PR COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT DVD controller English 17 En OTHER CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting an HDMI component HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital A/V (audio/ video) interface. By connecting to an HDMI component (such as a TV), you can enjoy standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as digital audio using a single cable. When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video interface that meets the security requirements of content providers and system operators. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”. Viewing and Listening to playback from an HDMI component To output an HDMI signal, you need to configure the settings manually. It is necessary to prepare in advance to output an HDMI signal. 1 Set the system to standby mode. 2 Connect the HDMI terminals on your HDMI compatible device and the DVD controller using a commercially available HDMI cable. TV HDMI IN 4 To set the video output according to the HDMI compatible device, refer to “Video Output” on page 38 to access the DVD setup menu, and then set the two items under Video output in the system menu. – HDMI Resolution – HDMI Color Notes – This unit is designed to connect to HDMI compatible devices. If you connect to the DVI component, the system may not operate correctly. – The DVD controller is not compatible with HDCPincompatible HDMI or DVI components. – You need a commercially available HDMI/DVI conversion cable when you connect the DVD controller to other DVI components. – If you connect the system to the DVI component with a HDMI/DVI conversion cable, the HDMI terminal of the DVD controller does not output any audio signals. – Do not disconnect or connect the HDMI cable from the DVD controller or turn off the power of the HDMI/DVI component connected to the HDMI OUTPUT terminal of the DVD controller while data is being transferred. Doing so may disrupt playback or cause noise. – PCM signal downmixed to two channels can be output from the HDMI output terminal. ■ Connecting the FM antenna ANTENNA FM 75 UNBAL. DVD controller INPUT Subwoofer/system control Y Connect an indoor FM antenna to the ANTENNA terminal. Extend the FM antenna and fix its ends to the wall. For better FM stereo reception, connect an external FM antenna. VIDEO PB PR COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT HDMI OUTPUT 3 To output an audio signal from the DVD controller to the HDMI compatible device, refer to “System menu” on page 65. After doing the settings, set the DVD controller to standby mode, and then turn on the system again. 18 En Notes – Adjust the position of the antenna for optimal reception. – Position the antenna as far as possible from your TV, VCR or other sources of radiation to prevent unwanted interference. OTHER CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting external AV components Connect the subwoofer/system control and external AV equipment as shown in the illustration. When connecting to optical type digital AV components OPTICAL DIGITAL OUTPUT OPTICAL DIGITAL OUTPUT Connecting analog AV components Connect the DVD controller and external AV equipment as shown in the illustration. Digital audio component TV 2 CONNECTIONS If you connect external AV equipment, such as a VCR or cassette deck, to the audio input terminal on the subwoofer/system control, you can listen to those audio sources on the system. This section provides some examples of VCR and digital AV equipment connections. Connecting digital AV components Game console INPUT OPTICAL OPTICAL VCR (for example) COAXIAL ANALOG DOCK Subwoofer/system control Subwoofer/system control When connecting to coaxial type digital AV components INPUT OPTICAL OPTICAL COAXIAL DIGITAL OUTPUT COAXIAL ANALOG Digital audio component DOCK INPUT OPTICAL OPTICAL COAXIAL ANALOG DOCK English 19 En OTHER CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting the power cable Connecting optional equipment The system is equipped with the DOCK terminal, which allows you to connect the Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 or YDS-11, sold separately) or Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately). Connect the optional equipment to the DOCK terminal of the subwoofer/system control using its dedicated cable. After you have made all connections, connect the power cable of the subwoofer/system control. SPEAKERS SPEAKER IMPEDANCE : 6 MIN. MAINS When connecting the Yamaha iPod universal dock Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 or YDS-11, sold separately) To AC outlet Hint OPTICAL COAXIAL ANALOG DOCK When connecting the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately) OPTICAL COAXIAL ANALOG DOCK 20 En You can attach or detach the cover according to your preference after you have made all connections. Attach the cover to the rear panel of subwoofer/system control using the 6 supplied screws as shown. PREPARATION GETTING STARTED ■ Inserting batteries into the remote control ■ Using the remote control Use the remote control within 6 m of the DVD controller and point it toward the remote control sensor. STANDBY / ON Within 6 m 2 1 PREPARATION Press 3 EJECT 30˚ 30˚ 3 1 Press on the battery cover and open the cover. ENTER TV/ STB CH 2 Insert the two supplied batteries (AA, R6, UM-3) into the battery compartment. Insert the batteries according to the polarity markings (+ and –). 3 Close the battery cover. Replacing the batteries If the batteries run low, the effective operation distance of the remote control decreases considerably. If this happens, replace the batteries with two new ones as soon as possible. Notes – Do not use an old battery together with new one. – Do not use different types of batteries (for example, alkaline and manganese) together. Each type of battery has its own characteristics even if they are similar in shape. – If the batteries run out, immediately remove them from the remote control to prevent an explosion or acid leak. – Dispose of the batteries according to the regional regulations. – If a battery starts leaking, dispose of it immediately. Be careful not to let leaking battery acid come into contact with your skin or clothing. Before inserting new batteries, wipe the compartment clean. – Replace the batteries within two minutes to preserve the preset code in the remote control. Hint Remove the transparent sheet before using the remote control. Basic operation of the remote control 1 Use the Input selection buttons on the remote control to select the input source you wish to control (for example DVD/USB). → The selected source appears in the front panel display. When the button contains several input sources such as DVD/USB and INPUT 1-4 buttons, the input source switches each time you press the button. CH TV VOL TV INPUT DVD/ USB POSITION VOLUME TUNER MUTE INPUT 1-4 DOCK AREA SOUND Input selection buttons TEST 2 Operate the desired function (for example, h or b / a). Notes 21 En English – Be careful not to spill liquid on the remote control. – Be careful not to drop the remote control. – Do not leave the remote control in the following places: – hot or humid places, such as near a heater or in a bathroom – extremely cold places – dusty places – To operate your TV with the remote control, you need to set the preset code. Refer to “Setting the preset code” on page 66 for how to change the preset code. GETTING STARTED ■ Turn on the system Press STANDBY/ON on the DVD controller or the remote control. The LED indicators beside the disc loading slot light up when the system is turned on. DVX-700 WP87010 STANDBY/ON TV STB POWER STANDBY/ON FUNC. MOVIE MUSIC STEREO ENHANCER 10KEY SPORTS GAME NIGHT SLEEP Light up STANDBY / ON 22 En EJECT GETTING STARTED ■ Setting the video input/output Notes Set the aspect ratio of the DVD controller according to the TV you have connected. The format you select must be available on the disc. If it is not, the TV display setting will not affect the picture during playback. TOP MENU 3 MENU INFO. 1 Press DVD/USB repeatedly until “DVD” appears in the front panel display. 2 Turn on the TV and set to the correct video-in channel. → You should see the background screen on the TV. – Usually this channel is between the lowest and highest channels and may be called FRONT, A/V IN or VIDEO. See your TV manual for more details. – Or, you may go to channel 1 on your TV, then press the Channel down button repeatedly until you see the Video In channel. – Or, the TV remote control may have a button or switch that chooses different video modes. PRESET/CH PREPARATION – Make sure that you have completed all the necessary connections (Refer to “Connecting a TV” on page 17). – If the settings you have selected are not appropriate, you can reset DVD settings to the initial factory settings (Refer to “System menu” on page 65). Setting the TV display A-E/CAT. ENTER SETUP A-E/CAT. RETURN TV/ STB CODE SET CH 1 Press SETUP on the remote control. DVD setup menu is displayed on the screen. Play Mode Video Adjust Initial Setting Disc Navigator 2 Press / / / on the remote control to highlight [Initial Settings], and then press ENTER. Initial Setting Video Output TV Screen Language Component Out 4:3 (Letter Box) Interlace Display HDMI Resolution 720x480p Options HDMI Color Component 3 Press / on the remote control to highlight [Video Output], and then press ENTER. English 23 En GETTING STARTED 4 Press / on the remote control to highlight [TV Screen], and then press ENTER. Selecting the output type for COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT jacks Video Output TV Screen 4:3 (Letter Box) To use progressive display function, connect to a TV, which has that function, via COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT jacks. Language Component Out Interlace 1 Press SETUP on the remote control. Display HDMI Resolution 720x480p Options HDMI Color Component Initial Setting 2 Press / / / on the remote control to highlight [Initial Settings], and then press ENTER. 3 Press / on the remote control to highlight [Video Output], and then press ENTER. 5 Press / on the remote control to highlight one of the options below, and then press ENTER. 4:3 (Letter Box) Select this if you have a conventional TV. In this case, a wide picture with black bar on the upper and lower portions of the TV screen will be displayed. 4:3 (Pan&Scan) Select this if you have a conventional TV and want both sides of the picture to be trimmed or formatted to fit your TV screen. 4 Press / on the remote control to highlight [Component Out], and then press ENTER. Initial Setting Video Output TV Screen Language Component Out 4:3 (Letter Box) Interlace Display HDMI Resolution 720x480p Options HDMI Color Component Note If the disc does not support an aspect ratio of 4:3 (Pan&Scan), the content is displayed in 4:3 (Letter Box). 16:9 (Wide) Select this if you have a wide-screen TV. 16:9 (Compressed) Select this if a wide-screen TV is connected to the DVD controller with an HDMI cable, and set HDMI Resolution to either [1920 x 1080p], [1920 x 1080i], or [1280 x 720p]. When playing back a content whose aspect ratio is 4:3, black bars cover the sides of the screen. 24 En 5 Press / on the remote control to highlight [Progressive] / [Interlace], and then press ENTER. 6 When the confirmation screen appears, press ENTER again. To cancel the setting, press RETURN. Note Do not select [Progressive] if your TV does not have a progressive display function. If your TV is also connected via HDMI OUTPUT terminal, the system may ignore this setting and output the progressive signal from COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT jacks. GETTING STARTED ■ Setting language preferences You can select your preferred language settings so that this controller will automatically switch to your preferred language whenever you load a disc. If the language selected is not available on the disc, the disc’s default setting language will be used instead. The OSD (on-screen display) language for the DVD setup menu will remain as you set it, regardless of various disc languages. 1 Press SETUP on the remote control. DVD setup menu appears on the screen. 2 Press / / / on the remote control to highlight [Initial Settings], and then press ENTER. 3 Press / on the remote control to highlight [Language], and then press ENTER. 1 Press SETUP on the remote control. DVD setup menu appears on the screen. Initial Setting 2 Press / / / on the remote control to highlight [Initial Settings], and then press ENTER. 3 Press / on the remote control to highlight [Display], and then press ENTER. Video Output Audio Language English Language Subtitle Language English Display DVD Menu Lang. English Options Subtitle Display On 3 PREPARATION On-screen display (OSD) language Audio, Subtitle and Disc menu languages Initial Setting Video Output OSD Language English Language Angle Indicator On Display Options 4 Press / on the remote control to highlight the item below, and then press ENTER. – Audio Language – Subtitle Language – DVD Menu Language Hint 4 Press / on the remote control to highlight [OSD Language], and then press ENTER. 5 Press / on the remote control to select a language, and then press ENTER. Refer to page 40 for the other items. 5 Press / on the remote control to select a language, and then press ENTER. English 25 En BASIC OPERATIONS DISC OPERATION This unit is designed for use with DVD, CD, Video CD, and Super Video CD, as well as DivX® files and WMV files recorded on CD-R or DVD-R/DVD+R. IMPORTANT! – DVD discs and players are designed with regional restrictions. Before playing a disc, make sure that the disc is for the same zone as your DVD controller. – Do not insert any objects other than discs into the disc loading slot. Doing so may cause the DVD controller to malfunction. – Depending on the disc, some functions may be prohibited. – This unit is not compatible with 8-cm discs. ■ Playing discs 1 Turn on the system. 2 Press DVD/USB repeatedly until “DVD” appears in the front panel display. Playing DivX® video/WMV files DivX® video file This unit can play DivX® videos recorded on CD-R/RW, DVD-R/-RW, DVD+R/+RW discs. By default they will be played in alphabetical order. The supported files are shown below. – Plays all versions of DivX® video (including DivX® 6) with enhanced playback of DivX® media files and the DivX® media format. – The following filename extensions are supported “.avi” and “.divx”. Displaying external subtitle files The font sets listed below are available for external subtitle files. You can see the proper font set on-screen by setting [Subtitle Language] to match the subtitle file. Group 1 Albanian (sq), Basque (eu), Catalan (ca), Danish (da), Dutch (nl), English (en), Faroese (fo), Finnish (fi), French (fr), German (de), Icelandic (is), Irish (ga), Italian (it), Norweigian (no), Portuguese (pt), Rhaeto-Romanic (rm), Scottish (gd), Spanish (es), Swedish (sv) Group 2 Albanian (sq), Croatian (hr), Czech (cs), Hungarian (hu), Polish (pl), Romanian (ro), Slovak (sk), Slovenian (sl) Group 3 Bulgarian (bg), Byelorussian (be), Macedonian (mk), Russian (ru), Serbian (sr), Ukrainian (uk) Group 4 Hebrew (iw), Yiddish (ji) Group 5 Turkish (tr) 3 Turn on the TV power and set to the correct Video-in channel (Refer to “Setting the video input/output” on page 23). → You should see the background screen on the TV. 4 Insert the disc into the disc loading slot. STANDBY / ON EJECT 5 Press h to start playback. → If a disc menu appears on the TV, refer to “Using the disc menu (DVD only)” on page 28. → If the disc is locked by parental lock function, you must enter your 4-digit password (Refer to “Parental Lock” on page 41). Note If you do the operation that is not available during playback, a message “This operation can’t be performed.” or “Depending on the disc, this operation may be prohibited.” appears. 26 En – Some external subtitle files may be displayed incorrectly or not at all. – For external subtitle files, the following subtitle format filename extensions are supported: “.srt”, “.sub”, “.ssa”, “.smi” – The filename of the movie file has to be repeated at the beginning of the filename for the external subtitle file. – The number of external subtitle files which can be switched for the same movie file is limited to a maximum of 10. DISC OPERATION ■ Basic playback controls DVX-700 WP87010 STANDBY/ON MOVIE TV STB FUNC. 10KEY MUSIC STEREO ENHANCER POWER SPORTS GAME NIGHT SLEEP When using Numeric keypad 0-9 Switch FUNC./10KEY to 10KEY Numeric keypad 0-9 DISP. MODE AUDIO DELAY ZOOM ON ON SCREEN BLUETOOTH OFF AUDIO SUBTITLE PLAY MODE 4 ANGLE CLEAR BASIC OPERATIONS WMV file WMV content can be encoded by using Windows Media Encoder. The supported files are shown below. – The DVD controller is compatible with WMV9 files that are encoded by using the Windows Media Encoder 9 Series, with “.wmv” as an filename extension. – Compatible with size under 720 x 576 pixels/720 x 480 pixels. – The available maximum bit rate is about 2 to 3 Mbps. The maximum bit rate varies depending on the encode method. – Advanced Profile is not supported. – DRM-Protected video files are not played in the DVD controller. LOCK SRCH MODE TOP MENU AUTO/ MANUAL PRESET/CH MEMORY MENU To pause playback During playback, press e. – To resume normal playback, press h. To stop playback Press s. To select track/chapter Press b / a to select previous/next track or chapter. You can enter a track/chapter number using Numeric keypad 0-9. To search backward/forward Press w / f. – To resume normal playback, press h. – When searching, press w / f again to increase the search speed. (DVD, CD, and VideoCD only) To playback in slow motion During pause, press and hold f to play back in slow motion. To resume normal playback, press h. During pause, press and hold w to play back in reverse slow motion. (DVD only) Hint During slow motion playback, press w / f to change the playback speed. (DVD, CD, and Video CD only) To advance by frame During pause, press f to advance by frame. To resume normal mode, press h. During pause, press w to reverse by frame. (DVD only) 27 En English To adjust the volume level Press VOLUME +/– on the remote control or VOLUME u / d on the DVD controller. The volume level appears in the front panel display. DISC OPERATION ■ Ejecting a disc Press s to stop disc playback, and then press EJECT on the DVD controller. EJECT STANDBY / ON EJECT Note Do not push the ejected disc when reloading it. To reload the ejected disc, press EJECT, or remove the disc from the disc loading slot fully, then insert it to the disc loading slot once again. ■ Using the disc menu (DVD only) To display the disc menu Press TOP MENU to display the top-level disc menu. Press MENU to return to the main menu. The same menu as the top-level disc menu may appear depending on the disc. Hint – Depending on the disc, a menu may appear on the TV screen once you load a disc. – The disc menu is displayed when you press TOP MENU during playing DivX® files. (If available) Note Depending on the disc, these menus do not appear on the TV screen. To select a playback feature or item Press / / / on the remote control, then press ENTER to start playback. You can also specify the number to select a feature or item. To enter a number, switch FUNC./10KEY to 10KEY. 28 En ■ Playback control (PBC) (Video CD only) Some Video CD/super Video CD discs are compatibility with PBC function. PBC playback allows you to play Video CDs interactively, following the menu on the display. To display the PBC menu When you insert a video CD or super video CD with PBC function and press h, playback starts with the function. During playback, press RETURN to display the menu. Press b / a to display the other menu on the previous/next page. To select a track in PBC menu To select a track, switch FUNC./10KEY to 10KEY, enter the number, and then press ENTER. Note To disable PBC, press s twice, then press a. You can enter a track number using Numeric keypad 09 instead of pressing a. To enable PBC again, press s twice, then press h to play back. ■ Changing soundtrack language While playing a DVD with multiple language soundtracks, press AUDIO repeatedly to select the language. Notes – If you cancel the resume mode or eject the disc, the language gets back to the default setting. – When playing a Video CD, it switches 1/L (Left) and 2/R (Right). – You can change the soundtrack language by pressing AUDIO during playing DivX® video files. (if available) – Depending on the disc, you can change the soundtrack language only in the disc menu. DISC OPERATION ■ Changing subtitle language ■ Displaying disc information This operation works only on DVDs with multiple subtitle languages. You can change the language you want while playing a DVD. Press SUBTITLE repeatedly to select a language from the various subtitle languages. Press ON SCREEN to display track, chapter and title information. Press ON SCREEN repeatedly to select the information. Notes This function allows you to enlarge the picture double or quadruple of the original size. While playing a disc, press ZOOM once to double or twice to quadruple the size. You can move the zoom point using / / / . Press ZOOM one more time to return to the original size. 4 BASIC OPERATIONS – If you cancel the resume mode or eject the disc, the language gets back to the default setting. – Depending on the disc, you can change the language only in the disc menu. – You can change the subtitle language by pressing SUBTITLE during playing DivX® video files. (if available) ■ Zooming in ■ Resuming playback from the last stopped point With the exception of VR format DVD-R/-RW discs, when you stop playback of a DVD, CD, or Video CD/ Super video CD or DivX® video/WMV discs, “RESUME” appears in the front panel display indicating that you can resume playback again from that point. With DVDs and Video CD/Super video CDs, if you eject the disc in the DVD controller after stopping playback, the last play position is stored in memory. If the next disc you load is the same one, “Last Memory” appears and playback will resume. For DVD-Video discs, the system stores the play position of the last five discs. When one of these discs is next loaded, you can resume playback. Hints – To clear the resume point, press s again while “RESUME” is displayed. – If you don’t need the Last Memory function when you stop a disc, you can press EJECT to stop playback and eject the disc. Notes – Resume and Last Memory functions may not work with some discs. – As for CD and movie files (DivX®/WMV), the resume point is cleared when the disc is ejected or the input is changed. ■ Viewing from another angle If the disc contains sequences recorded from different camera angles, the angle mark appears on the screen. Press ANGLE repeatedly to select the desired angle. Hint English You can hide the angle mark (Page 41). 29 En DISC OPERATION ■ Advanced operation When playing discs, you can use advanced operations such as repeat playback and programming playback. Use the menu to set them. PLAY MODE CLEAR LOCK SRCH MODE AUTO/ MANUAL MEMORY A-B repeat playback Select [A-B Repeat] in the Play Mode menu, then press ENTER. Specify the section according to the following procedure. Once you specify the section, repeat playback starts. Starting point: Select [A (Start)], then press ENTER at the point you want to start repeating. End point: TOP MENU PRESET/CH Select [B (End point)], then press ENTER at the point you want to end repeating. MENU INFO. A-E/CAT. ENTER SETUP A-E/CAT. Exiting repeat playback: Select [OFF], then press ENTER. RETURN CODE SET 1 Press PLAY MODE on the remote control. Play Mode menu appears. Play Mode Notes – A-B repeat playback is not available for DivX® Video/WMV discs. – You cannot specify the section that straddles tracks. A-B Repeat A (Start Point) Repeat playback Repeat B (End Point) Random Off Select [Repeat] in Play Mode menu, then press ENTER. Select [Title Repeat]/[Chapter Repeat], then press ENTER at the point you want to repeat. Repeat playback starts. To exit the repeat playback, select [Repeat Off], then press ENTER. Program Serch Mode 2 Use / to select playback function, then press ENTER. Setup for each items. Refer to the description below. [A-B Repeat] Repeats a specific section between A and B Available repeat playback DVD: [Title Repeat], [Chapter Repeat] CD/Video CD: [Disc Repeat], [Track Repeat] DivX®/WMV: [Title Repeat], [Chapter Repeat] (if supported) [Repeat] Repeats title/chapter/disc/track [Random] Plays titles/chapters/tracks randomly Hint [Program] Plays titles/chapters/tracks in the order you want You can use program playback with repeat playback. If program playback is active, you can select [Program Repeat]. [Search Mode] Plays a specific chapter/track/time that you want to play 3 Press SETUP to return to the previous screen. 30 En Random playback Select [Random] in Play Mode menu, then press ENTER. When playing DVD, select [Random Title]/[Random Chapter], then press ENTER. When playing CD/Video CD, select [On], then press ENTER. To exit the random playback, select [Random Off], then press ENTER. DISC OPERATION Program playback Select [Program] in the Play Mode menu, then press ENTER. When playing a DVD, you can program the order the titles/chapters are played back. When playing a CD/Video CD, you can only program the order the tracks are played back. CD/Video CD: [Track Search], [Time Search] DivX®/WMV: [Time Search], [Chapter Search] (if supported) You can select [Time Search] during playback. Enter a 4digit number to specify the minutes and seconds. For example, to specify 32 minutes and 20 seconds, enter 3220. To specify 1 hour, 25 minute, and 40 second, enter 8540. Program Total Time 000.00 Program Step 01. 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. 4 BASIC OPERATIONS Programming the playback order Select [Create/Edit] and press ENTER to open program list to set the playback order. Use / / / and ENTER to program the order. You can store up to 24 steps. Each time you press ENTER, the step moves to the next. Use the same procedure to complete the programming. Search mode types DVD: [Title Search], [Chapter Search], [Time Search] Track 1-14 Track 01 Track 02 Track 03 Track 04 Track 05 Track 06 Track 07 Track 08 Hints – To remove the step, press CLEAR on the step. – To add a step in the middle of the list, select a title/ chapter/track. – If you press SETUP after programming, program playback is canceled. To do the program play back again, enter [Program] again. Starting/Stopping program playback In program mode, press h to start program playback. Press s to stop the program playback. During program playback, press b / a to skip to the next or previous programmed title/chapter/track. Hint You can also start/stop program playback by selecting [Playback Start]/[Playback Stop]. Deleting the program order Select [Program Delete] in the menu, then press ENTER. Using search mode English Select [Search Mode] in Play Mode menu, then press ENTER. Select the item you want to search, then enter a title/ chapter/track number using Numeric keypad 0-9. Press ENTER to start playback. 31 En DISC OPERATION ■ Disc navigator When playing DVD or Video CD, you can display a list of titles and tracks using disc navigator. TOP MENU PRESET/CH MENU INFO. A-E/CAT. ENTER SETUP 01 02 03 04 05 06 A-E/CAT. RETURN TV/ STB CODE SET 1 Press SETUP on the remote control. DVD setup menu appears. Play Mode Video Adjust Initial Setting Disc Navigator 2 Press / / / to highlight [Disc Navigator], then press ENTER. 3 Select the item that you want to display in a list, then press ENTER. The available items vary depending on the disc that you are loading. DVD-Video: [Title], [Chapter] DVD-R/-R DL/-RW (VR format): [Original: Title], [Original: Time], [Playlist: Title], [Playlist: Time] Video CD: [Track], [Time] Hints – Select [Time] to display an image from every 10 minutes. – Original means the titles recorded on a DVD recorder. Playlist means the titles arranged based on Original. 32 En 4 Select a number, then press ENTER to start playback. 6 titles/chapters/tracks will be displayed on the screen. Press b / a to display the next/previous page. You can select the number either from the menu or remote control. PLAYING OTHER DISCS This system can play audio files and picture files recorded on CD-R or DVD-R/DVD+R, etc. ■ To play back audio files The audio files recorded on the disc are played back. Note 1 Insert the disc that contains audio files. The files and folders may not be recognized if the disc is in the following condition. There are 299 or more folders in a disc. There are 648 or more files or subfolders in a folder. 2 Press h, and playback starts. During the playback, you can use the following operations. DISP. MODE AUDIO DELAY ZOOM ON BLUETOOTH OFF AUDIO SUBTITLE PLAY MODE Hints – The available sampling frequency is 32/44.1/48 kHz. – The recommended bit rate for MP3/WMA is 128 kbps or higher. – The supported bit rate for MPEG-4 AAC is between 16 and 320 kbps. – The following filename extensions are supported. “.mp3” or “.MP3” (for MP3 files), “.wma” or “.WMA” (for WMA files), “.m4a” (for MPEG-4 AAC) TOP MENU Still – – – CLEAR AUTO/ MANUAL PRESET/CH MEMORY MENU e Pauses the slide show. When playing a disc with audio files, it pauses the music. b/a Plays the previous/next track. ON SCREEN Displays the track information on the TV display. Notes – Files that are encoded in VBR (Variable Bit Rate) cannot be played. – Files that are encoded in loss-less format cannot be played. – DRM copy-protected files cannot be played. – Encode the WMA files with an application that is certified by Microsoft Corporation. If not, the files may not play back correctly. – MPEG-4 AAC files encoded with iTunes are supported. Those files may not play back correctly depending on the version of iTunes. ANGLE LOCK SRCH MODE 4 ON SCREEN BASIC OPERATIONS Compressed audio file – MPEG1 audio layer3 (MP3) – Windows Media Audio (WMA) – MPEG-4 AAC 3 Press s to stop. image file JPEG FUJICOLOR CD KODAK Picture CD Hints English – This unit is compatible with JPEG images that are 3072 x 2048 pixels or less. – This unit supports the files that are compliant with Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format) version 2.2. – The image file must have the file name extension “.jpg” or “.JPG”. Note This unit does not support progressive JPEG images. 33 En PLAYING OTHER DISCS ■ To start a slide show of JPEG files JPEG files recorded on the disc are played back in order in slide show. During the slide show, you can play back all JPEG files in the disc in order. Hints – If the disc contains several folders, the pictures in each folders are displayed in alphabetical order. – If the disc contains both JPEG files and compressible audio files, you can enjoy the music during the slide show. ■ Selecting a file to play back You can select a file that you want to play back using Disc Navigator. 1 Press SETUP after inserting the disc you want to play back. The DVD setup menu appears on the screen. 2 Select [Disc Navigator], then press ENTER. Disc Navigator is opens. 00:00 00:00 0kbps \ 1 Insert a the disc that contains JPEG files. folder_1 folder_2 2 Press h. The slide show starts. During the slide show, you can do the following operations. folder_3 folder_4 folder_5 folder_6 DISP. MODE AUDIO DELAY ZOOM ON ON SCREEN BLUETOOTH OFF AUDIO SUBTITLE PLAY MODE ANGLE CLEAR LOCK SRCH MODE TOP MENU AUTO/ MANUAL MEMORY PRESET/CH MENU INFO. A-E/CAT. ENTER SETUP A-E/CAT. RETURN CODE SET e Pauses the slide show. When playing a disc with audio files, it pauses the music. b/a / / Move to the previous/next picture. When playing a disc with audio files, it plays the previous/next song. / Pauses the slide show to rotate or flip the picture. Press h to restart the slide show. ZOOM Pauses the slide show to enlarge the picture. Each time you press the key, the picture size doubles, quadruples, and then returns to normal. Press h to restart the slide show. MENU Displays Disc Navigator. 3 Press s to stop the slide show. 34 En 3 Press / to select the file you want to play back. If you select a JPEG file, the preview image appears in the right window. To move to the one lower folder Select the folder, then press or ENTER. To move to the one upper folder Press . You can also move by selecting the [. .] folder. 4 Press ENTER to play back the selected file/folder. When playing audio/movie files Playback starts from the selected file and plays the files in the folder. When playing JPEG files The slide show starts from the selected file and plays the files in the folder. Hint When the disc contains both audio files and JPEG files, play back an audio file first, then play back the pictures to enjoy the music during the slide show. In this case, e and b / a is used for JPEG files. 5 Press s to stop playback. PLAYING OTHER DISCS ■ Using a USB device You can play back audio files, and picture files saved on your USB devices. Supported USB devices The DVD controller supports USB mass storage class devices (e.g., flash memories, card readers, portable audio players) using FAT16 or FAT32 format. Notes Yamaha and suppliers accepts no liability for the loss of data saved on the USB devices connected to the DVD controller. As a precaution, it is recommended that the files are tested after they have been saved on. 1 Press DVD/USB repeatedly until “USB” appears in the front panel display. 2 Connect your USB device to the USB terminal of the DVD controller. 4 BASIC OPERATIONS – Some devices may not work properly even if they meet the requirements. – If “USB ERROR” or “NO USB” appears in the front panel display, see the following methods. – Set the system to the standby mode, and then turn it on again. – Disconnect the device when the DVD controller is in the standby mode, then connect it again and turn on the DVD controller. – Set the input source to USB, then remove and insert the USB device. – Select the input source other than USB, then Set it back to USB again. – Connect the AC adapter if the adapter is supplied with the device. – If the electrical power consumption of the USB device is high, the USB device may not be used correctly. – Do not connect devices other than USB mass storage class devices: USB chargers, USB hubs, PCs, etc. Playing data files INPUT USB USB device 3 Start playback in either of the following ways. When playing back all files in a USB device Press h to start playback. When playing back the selected files Press MENU to open Disc Navigator. Press / / / to select files, then press h. Refer to page 34 for how to select files. 4 Press s to stop playback. Before you remove the USB device, select an input source other than USB. Note When the input source is USB, you cannot open the DVD setup menu. English 35 En DVD SETUP MENU DVD SETUP MENU OPTIONS ■ Menu overview [Video Adjust] menu Adjusts the picture quality. The bold items/parameters listed below are the default settings. Menu Item Setting item/Parameter Sharpness Fine, Standard, Soft Brightness –20 – 0 – +20 Contrast –16 – 0 – +16 Gamma High, Medium, Low, Off Hue green 9 – 0 – red 9 Chroma Level –9 – 0 – +9 [Initial Settings] menu Make advanced settings. The bold items/parameters listed below are the default settings. Menu Item Video Output Language Display Options Setting Item Parameter TV Screen 38 Component Out Progressive, Interlace 38 HDMI Resolution 1920x1080p, 1920x1080i, 1280x720p, 720x480p*/720x576p*, 720x480i*/720x576i* 39 HDMI Color Full range RGB, RGB, Component 39 Audio Language English, French, German, Italian, Spanish, Other Language 40 Subtitle Language English, French, German, Italian, Spanish, Other Language 40 DVD Menu Lang. W/ Subtitle Lang., English, French, German, Italian, Spanish, Other Language 40 Subtitle Display On, Off 40 OSD Language English, Français, Deutsch, Italiano, Español 41 Angle Indicator On, Off 41 Parental Lock Password, Level Change, Country Code 41 DivX(R) VOD Display 42 * Depending on the disc, NTSC and PAL switches automatically. For U.S.A. and Canada models, only NTSC is available. Notes – Refer to page 30 for [Play Mode] – Refer to page 32 for [Disc Navigator] 36 En Page 4:3 (Letter Box), 4:3 (Pan&Scan), 16:9 (Wide), 16:9 (Compressed) VIDEO ADJUST MENU This setup is carried out via the TV, enabling you to customize the DVD controller to suit your particular requirements TOP MENU PRESET/CH MENU INFO. A-E/CAT. ENTER SETUP RETURN DVD/ USB TUNER MUTE INPUT 1-4 DOCK AREA [Brightness] Increase or decrease the value to adjust the brightness. You can adjust the value from -20 to +20 using / . 5 SOUND [Contrast] Increase or decrease the value to adjust the sharpness. You can adjust the value from -16 to +16 using / . TEST 1 Press DVD/USB repeatedly to switch the input source to DVD. 2 Press SETUP on the remote control. DVD setup menu appears. Play Mode Video Adjust Initial Setting Disc Navigator [Gamma] Select this to adjust the darkness. Choose from High/ Medium/Low/Off. DVD SETUP MENU TV INPUT [Sharpness] Select this to adjust the sharpness. Choose from Fine/ Standard/Soft. CODE SET TV/ STB POSITION A-E/CAT. 4 Select the item that you want to adjust, press ENTER, and then press / / / to adjust the image quality. You can adjust the following items in Video Adjust menu. [Hue] Select this to adjust the balance of green and red. You can adjust the value from Green 9 to Red 9 using / . [Chroma Level] Select this to adjust the color density. You can adjust the value from –9 to +9 using / . 5 Press ENTER to confirm. Repeat steps 3 and 4 if necessary. 6 Press SETUP to close the menu. Hints 3 Press / / / then press ENTER. to highlight [Video Adjust], – Once you confirm the values, you can select other items in Video Adjust menu. – If the settings you have selected are not appropriate, you can reset DVD settings to the initial factory settings (Page 65). Video Adjust ] Sharpness Fine Brightness Standard Contrast Soft Gamma Note The sharpness setting does not affect the HDMI signal. Hue Chroma Level English 37 En INITIAL SETTINGS MENU This setup is carried out via the TV, enabling you to customize the DVD controller to suit your particular requirements ■ Video Output Configure the video output settings. Initial Setting DVX-700 WP87010 STANDBY/ON TV FUNC. MOVIE MUSIC STEREO ENHANCER STB POWER 10KEY SPORTS GAME NIGHT SLEEP When using Numeric keypad 0-9 Switch FUNC./10KEY to 10KEY Video Output TV Screen Language Component Out 4:3 (Letter Box) Interlace Display HDMI Resolution 720x480p Options HDMI Color Component Numeric keypad 0-9 DISP. MODE AUDIO DELAY ZOOM ON ON SCREEN BLUETOOTH OFF AUDIO TOP MENU SUBTITLE PRESET/CH ANGLE TV Screen MENU INFO. A-E/CAT. ENTER SETUP RETURN DVD/ USB POSITION TUNER MUTE INPUT 1-4 DOCK AREA [4:3 (Letter Box)] (default) Select this if you have a conventional TV. In this case, a wide picture with black bands on the upper and lower portions of the TV screen will be displayed. CODE SET TV/ STB TV INPUT Set the aspect ratio according to the TV you have connected. A-E/CAT. SOUND TEST 1 Press DVD/USB repeatedly to switch the input source to DVD. [4:3 (Pan&Scan)] Select this if you have a conventional TV and want both sides of the picture to be trimmed or formatted to fit your TV screen. 2 Press SETUP on the remote control. DVD setup menu appears. Note 3 Press / / / then press ENTER. If the disc does not support an aspect ratio of 4:3 (Pan&Scan), the content is displayed in 4:3 (Letter Box). to highlight [Initial Settings], 4 Press / to highlight the item that you want to adjust, then press ENTER. Refer to the following explanations. 5 Press ENTER to confirm. Repeat steps 3 and 4 if necessary. 6 Press SETUP to close the menu. Hint If the settings you have selected are not appropriate, you can reset DVD settings to the initial factory settings (Page 65). [16:9 (Wide)] Select this if you have a wide-screen TV. [16:9 (Compressed)] Select this if a wide-screen TV is connected to the DVD controller with an HDMI cable, and set HDMI Resolution to either [1920 x 1080p], [1920 x 1080i], or [1280 x 720p]. When playing back a content whose aspect ratio is 4:3, black bars cover the sides of the screen. Component Out Select the video type output via the COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT jacks. [Progressive] Select this if the connected TV has progressive display function. When you select this and press ENTER, the confirmation screen appears. Press ENTER again to confirm the setting. If you want to cancel the setting, press RETURN. 38 En INITIAL SETTINGS MENU [Interlace] (default) Select this if the connected TV does not have progressive display function. Notes – Do not select [Progressive] if the connected TV does not have progressive display function. – If your TV is also connected via HDMI OUTPUT terminal, the progressive signal may be output from the COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT jacks. HDMI Resolution [1920 x 1080p] Select this if the connected TV is designed for progressive 1920 x 1080 resolution. Set the color output for the HDMI component. [RGB Full Range] Reproduces bright white and deep black colors. Select this if the image reproducibility is poor. [RGB] Select this to lower the intensity of the picture when you selected RGB Full Range. [Component] Select this to set the standard component video output format of the HDMI component. Note The default setting varies depending on your HDMI component. 1080p/60Hz (NTSC) 1080p/50Hz (PAL) [1920 x 1080i] Select this if the connected TV is designed for interlaced 1920 x 1080 resolution. 5 DVD SETUP MENU Set the resolution output via the HDMI OUTPUT terminal. Select the resolution and press ENTER, and a message appears on the screen. Select [YES] to confirm. The available values are shown below. HDMI Color 1080i/60Hz (NTSC) 1080i/50Hz (PAL) [1280 x 720p] Select this if the connected TV is designed for progressive 1280 x 720 resolution. 720p/60Hz (NTSC) 720p/50Hz (PAL) [720 x 480p] / [720 x 576p] (default) Select this if the connected TV is designed for progressive 720 x 480 (NTSC color system)/720 x 576 (PAL color system) resolution. 480p/60Hz (NTSC) 576p/50Hz (PAL) [720 x 480i] / [720 x 576i] Select this if the connected TV is designed for interlaced 720 x 480 (NTSC color system)/720 x 576 (PAL color system) resolution. 480i/60Hz (NTSC) 576i/50Hz (PAL) Notes English – Depending on the disc, NTSC and PAL switches automatically. For U.S.A. and Canada models, only NTSC is available. – When you change the resolution, the screen may be distorted or take some time to be displayed. – If the screen is not displayed correctly, reset HDMI resolution to the initial setting (Page 65). 39 En INITIAL SETTINGS MENU ■ Language These menus contain various language options for the audio, subtitle and disc menus recorded on the DVD. For details, Refer to “DISC OPERATION” on page 26. Initial Setting Audio Language English Language Subtitle Language English Display DVD Menu Lang. English Options Subtitle Display On Video Output Notes – Depending on the disc, the language set on the DVD controller may not play. – If the disc does not contain the language that you set on the DVD controller, it may play in another in language. Audio Language Selects an audio language. [English] (default), [French], [German], [Italian], [Spanish] The selected language is used as a default audio setting. [Other Language] Selects an audio language from 136 languages. Once you select this item and press ENTER, you can select a language in “List of Languages” or “Code.” Refer to “LIST OF LANGUAGE CODES” on the appendix for the corresponding codes. Subtitle Language Select the subtitle language. [English] (default), [French], [German], [Italian], [Spanish] The selected language is used as a default subtitle setting. [Other Language] Selects a subtitle language from 136 languages. Once you select this item and press ENTER, you can select a language in “List of Languages” or “Code.” Refer to “LIST OF LANGUAGE CODES” on the appendix for the corresponding codes. 40 En DVD Menu Lang. Selects an displaying language for the DVD menu. [W/ Subtitle Lang.] (default) Displays the menu in the language selected in [Subtitle Language]. [English], [French], [German], [Italian], [Spanish] Displays the menus in the selected language. [Other Language] Selects an audio language from 136 languages. Once you select this item and press ENTER, you can select a language in “List of Languages” or “Code.” Refer to “LIST OF LANGUAGE CODES” on the appendix for the corresponding codes. Subtitle Display Switch the subtitles On/Off. [On] The subtitles are displayed. [Off] The subtitles are not displayed. INITIAL SETTINGS MENU ■ Display ■ Options Set the screen display for the DVD controller. You can set other items such as parental lock. Initial Setting Initial Setting Video Output OSD Language English Video Output Parental Lock Language Angle Indicator On Language DivX(R) VOD Display Display Options Options Off 5 Parental Lock Selects a language for the DVD setup menu. Some DVDs may have a parental lock level assigned to the complete disc or to certain scenes on the disc. This feature lets you set a playback limitation level. The rating levels are from 1 to 8 and are country dependent. You can prohibit the playback of certain discs that are not suitable for your children, or play alternative scenes for certain discs. [English] (default), [Français], [Deutsch], [Italiano], [Español] Displays the DVD setup menu in the selected language. Angle Indicator Switches the angle mark on/off. If the disc contains sequences recorded from different camera angles, the angle mark appears on the screen. Press ANGLE repeatedly to select the desired angle. [On] The angle mark is displayed when the disc contains multiangles. [Off] The angle mark is not displayed even if the disc contains multi-angles. DVD SETUP MENU OSD Language [Password] Set a password to use for the parental lock function. You need to enter the password to cancel the parental lock. 1 To set a password, select [Password] and press ENTER. 2 Use Numeric keypad 0-9 on the remote control to enter a 4-digit number, then press ENTER to confirm. Hint When you play a DVD that is restricted by a parental lock, a screen requiring a password to be input appears. Use Numeric keypad 0-9 to enter the password. Notes – Keep the password secure. – If you forget the password, resets the DVD settings to the factory defaults, and set it again. For details, refer to “System menu” on page 65. English 41 En INITIAL SETTINGS MENU [Password Change] Once you set a password, the item name changes to [Password Change]. If you select [Password Change], you can change the password. 1 Select [Password Change] to change the password, then press ENTER. 2 Use Numeric keypad 0-9 on the remote control to enter the password that you have set before, then press ENTER. 3 Enter a new password using Numeric keypad 0-9, then press ENTER. [Level Change] You can change the parental lock level. 1 Select [Level Change], then press ENTER. 2 Use Numeric keypad 0-9 on the remote control to enter a password, then press ENTER to confirm. 3 Press / to change the parental lock level, then press ENTER. [Country Code] You can change the country code. Refer to appendix at the end of this manual. 1 Select [Country Code], then press ENTER. 2 Use Numeric keypad 0-9 on the remote control to enter a password, then press ENTER to confirm. 3 Press / to change the parental level, then press ENTER. You can enter country code using Numeric keypad 0-9. Note When you change the country code, eject the disc once. Reinsert the disc to apply the settings. 42 En DivX(R) VOD Yamaha provides you with the DivX® VOD (Video On Demand) registration code that allows you to rent and purchase videos using the DivX® VOD service. For more information, go to www.divx.com/vod. Notes – If you try to play files without an authorized registration code, a message “Authorization Error” appears and the file does not start. – If a file has a play time limit, the number of remaining plays is displayed on the screen. You may need to show the registration code of this unit to the delivery site. You can check the registration code as shown below. 1 Select [DivX(R) VOD], then press . 2 Select [Display], then press ENTER. The registration code is displayed. Initial Setting Video Output Language Display DivX(R)Video On Demand Your registration code is : XXXX To learn more visit www.divx.com/vod Options Done Registration code OTHER FUNCTIONS AIR SURROUND XTREME ■ What is AIR SURROUND XTREME? Ordinarily, two speakers, a center speaker, two surround speakers, and a subwoofer are necessary for enjoying 5.1 channel surround sound. ■ Listening to surround mode of AIR SURROUND XTREME DVX-700 WP87010 Typical 5.1 channel speaker system STANDBY/ON TV Front speakers FUNC. MOVIE MUSIC STB POWER 10KEY SPORTS GAME NIGHT SLEEP Subwoofer STEREO ENHANCER DISP. MODE AUDIO DELAY ZOOM Surround mode buttons ON SCREEN Press one of the surround mode buttons. The names of the selected input source and the selected surround mode appear in the front panel display. Surround speakers MOVIE Virtual 7.1 channel The AIR SURROUND XTREME technology, using only the left and right speakers of the this system and subwoofer, enables you to enjoy a realistic 7.1 channel sound by simulating sound from virtual speakers at center, surround, and surround backs. The sound image of the system Sw Surround mode descriptions MOVIE This mode is useful when you listen to a movie soundtrack on media such as DVDs, etc. 6 OTHER FUNCTIONS Center speaker Switch FUNC./10KEY to FUNC. MUSIC This mode is useful when you listen to music on media such as DVDs, etc. SPORTS This mode is useful when you enjoy sports or TV news programs. GAME This mode is useful when you play video games. Hints C: Center virtual speaker FR, FL: Front speaker SW: Subwoofer SR, SL: Surround virtual speaker SBR, SBL: Surround back virtual speaker – To reproduce the original sounds, press STEREO. – The system automatically memorizes the settings assigned to each input source. When you select another input, the system automatically recalls the last settings for the selected input. English You can check the virtual surround effect and adjust the volume balance according to your preference and the characteristics of your listening room. Refer to the following pages for details. – Checking the virtual surround effect. (Page 45) – Adjusting the volume balance. (Page 64) 43 En AIR SURROUND XTREME ■ Shifting the optimum listening area from side to side ■ Selecting the optimum distance between the speakers This function shifts the optimum listening area from side to side according to your listening position for the best Virtual Surround effect. The surround effect will be changed depending on the speaker positions. You can set the optimum distance area to enjoy the best surround effect at your listening position. 32" NARROW 80cm (32") 42" NORMAL The optimum listening area TOP MENU PRESET/CH MENU 120cm (48") INFO. A-E/CAT. ENTER SETUP DVD/ USB POSITION Over 42" A-E/CAT. WIDE RETURN TV/ STB INPUT 1-4 AREA SOUND CODE SET 200cm DOCK TEST TOP MENU POSITION R3 3 Press POSITION again or ENTER to exit position mode. Hints – The default setting is CENTER. – If you press TEST after performing step 1, the system outputs the test tone for a virtual center speaker so that you can adjust the position setting. (Page 45) – The setting is set for all the input sources. – This function is available even when surround mode is off. Note If you do not operate this function within 30 seconds after entering position mode, the system automatically exits position mode. 44 En MENU INFO. 1 Press POSITION to enter position mode. The current position appears in the front panel display. 2 Press / to shift the optimum listening area (L6, L5, L4, L3, L2, L1, CENTER, R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6). Adjust the optimum listening area from L1 to L6 when your listening position is to the left side of the center position, and adjust the optimum listening area from R1 to R6 when your listening position is to the right side of the center position. The position appears in the front panel display. PRESET/CH A-E/CAT. ENTER SETUP DVD/ USB POSITION A-E/CAT. RETURN TV/ STB INPUT 1-4 AREA SOUND CODE SET DOCK TEST 1 Press AREA when the surround mode is activated. The mode switches to the area setting mode. The current setting appears in the front panel display. AREA NORMAL 2 Use / to select one of the following area. NARROW: Select this when the distance between the speakers is about 80 cm. NORMAL: Select this when the distance between the speakers is about 120 cm. WIDE: Select this when the distance between the speakers is about 200 cm. Hints – The default setting is NORMAL. – When you select WIDE, slightly turn the speakers toward the listening position to get the better surround effect. 3 Press AREA or ENTER to apply the setting. AIR SURROUND XTREME ■ Using extended stereo mode Hint This function is available when the surround mode or extended stereo mode is on. If you do not operate this function within 30 seconds after entering area setting mode, the setting automatically exits area setting mode. An extended sound is achieved for a 2 channel source such as a CD player. FUNC. MOVIE STEREO ENHANCER ■ Checking the virtual surround effect You can check the virtual surround effect using test tones produced from the speakers. DVD/ USB POSITION INPUT 1-4 AREA SOUND MUSIC 10KEY SPORTS GAME NIGHT SLEEP DISP. MODE AUDIO DELAY ZOOM ON SCREEN Press STEREO to activate extended stereo mode. “EXTENDED” appears in the front panel display. DOCK EXTENDED TEST 1 Press TEST to output the test tone. TEST:L Active (virtual) speaker channel The output channel of the test tone cycles through as follows. Each channel outputs the test tone for about 2 seconds. L C R SW SL SR 3 To cancel test tone mode, press TEST again. Hints – The default setting is STEREO. – The system memorizes the settings assigned to each input source. – You can also turn on compressed music enhancer mode when extended stereo mode is turned on. Note 6 OTHER FUNCTIONS 2 The system outputs the test tone and the output channel of the test tone appears in the front panel display. Each time you press STEREO, the function is turned on (EXTENDED) and off (STEREO) alternately. This operation is only available when the surround mode is not activated. ■ Setting compressed music enhancer This function enhances your listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in a compression artifact. This is useful when you play back compressed music data stored on an iPod or a digital music player. Note MOVIE The surround back virtual speaker is included in SL and SR. MUSIC STEREO ENHANCER SPORTS GAME NIGHT SLEEP DISP. MODE AUDIO DELAY ZOOM ON SCREEN Press ENHANCER. The ENHANCER indicator lights up in the front panel display when this function is turned on. Each time you press ENHANCER, the function is turned on and off alternately. The selected mode is stored in memory even when the system is in the standby mode. Hints 45 En English – The default setting is OFF. – The system memorizes the settings assigned to each input source. – When this function is on, night listening mode is automatically set to off. LISTENING TO FM BROADCASTS Make sure that the FM antenna is connected to the subwoofer/system control when using the tuner The AUTO indicator lights up when the system is set to automatic tuning mode. Lights up You can use two tuning modes to tune into the desired FM station: Frequency tuning mode You can search or specify the frequency of the desired FM station automatically or manually. Preset tuning mode You can preset the desired FM stations in advance, and then recall the station by specifying the preset group and number. A FM 88.9 MHz 3 Press PRESET/CH / once to begin automatic tuning. When the system is tuned to a station, the TUNED indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown in the front panel display. Lights up ■ Basic tuning operation Hint DVX-700 WP87010 STANDBY/ON TV POWER STB FUNC. MOVIE 10KEY MUSIC STEREO ENHANCER SPORTS GAME NIGHT SLEEP When using Numeric keypad 0-9 Switch FUNC./10KEY to 10KEY Numeric keypad 0-9 DISP. MODE AUDIO DELAY ZOOM ON ON SCREEN BLUETOOTH OFF AUDIO SUBTITLE LOCKPTY SEEK START SRCH MODE TOP MENU AUTO/ MANUAL PRESET/CH ANGLE FREQ / TEXT MEMORY MENU INFO. A-E/CAT. ENTER SETUP A-E/CAT. RETURN TV/ STB TV VOL CODE SET VOLUME TV INPUT TUNER MUTE DVD/ USB INPUT 1-4 DOCK 1 Press TUNER repeatedly to set the input source to FM. “FM” appears in the front panel display. FM 2 Press AUTO/MANUAL to switch automatic tuning mode. 46 En A FM 89.1 MHz When you tune in an FM station using automatic tuning mode, the system receives the FM radio signal in stereo reception mode. The STEREO indicator appears in the front panel display. Manual tuning If the signal received from the station you want to select is weak, you can tune into the desired station by specifying the frequency manually. In FM tuning mode, press AUTO/MANUAL repeatedly so that the AUTO indicator disappears, and then press PRESET/ CH / repeatedly to specify the frequency of the desired station. If you tune into a station using the manual tuning feature, the system receives the FM radio signals in monaural reception mode to increase signal quality. LISTENING TO FM BROADCASTS Direct frequency tuning Use this feature to tune into the desired station directly by entering the frequency. ■ Using station preset feature You can store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset numbers in each of the 5 preset groups). 1 Press TUNER to set the input source to FM. 2 Press AUTO/MANUAL to select automatic tuning mode or manual tuning mode. SRCH MODE TOP MENU 3 Use Numeric keypad 0-9 to specify a radio frequency. For example, enter 1037 using Numeric keypad 0-9 to specify 103.7 MHz. AUTO/ MANUAL PRESET/CH MEMORY MENU INFO. A-E/CAT. ENTER SETUP Hint TV/ STB If the entered frequency is out of the range of the FM tuning, “WRONG STATION!” appears in the front panel display and then this unit automatically tunes into the last selected station. A-E/CAT. RETURN TV VOL CODE SET VOLUME TV INPUT TUNER MUTE DVD/ USB INPUT 1-4 DOCK 6 Available radio stations are automatically tuned in. You can set all available stations to a preset group at the same time by using automatic preset. Note Only radio stations with sufficient signal strength are set by automatic preset. If a radio station’s signal is weak, set it by using manual preset tuning. OTHER FUNCTIONS Automatic station preset 1 Press TUNER repeatedly to set the input source to FM. “FM” appears in the front panel display. 2 Press and hold MEMORY for more than 3 seconds. The preset group and number as well as the MEMORY and AUTO indicators flash. After approximately 5 seconds, automatic presetting starts from the current frequency and proceeds through higher frequencies. Press MEMORY again to cancel while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. Flashes A1:FM 88.9 MHz Flashes Hint 47 En English Press A-E/CAT. / to select a preset group, and then press PRESET/CH / . repeatedly to select a preset number to which the first station will be stored after you perform step 2. LISTENING TO FM BROADCASTS Notes Manual station preset – Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under the same preset number. – If the number of received stations does not reach 40 (A1 to E8), automatic preset tuning automatically stops after searching for all the available stations. Use this feature to store the radio stations manually. If the desired station is not stored, or a station is not stored to the desired preset group and number, preset the station manually. Refer to Manual station preset for details. 1 Tune into a station. Refer to “Basic tuning operation” on page 46 for the details. 2 Press MEMORY. The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel display for approximately 30 seconds. Press MEMORY again to cancel while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. Flashes A :FM 88.9 MHz 3 Press A-E/CAT. / repeatedly to select a preset group (A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The selected preset group appears. Flashes A :FM 88.9 MHz Preset group 4 Press PRESET/CH / to select a preset number (1 to 8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. Flashes A1:FM 88.9 MHz Preset number 5 Press MEMORY to confirm the preset. A1:PRESET OK After “A1:PRESET OK” appears in the front panel display, the frequency appears with the preset group and number you selected. The MEMORY indicator disappears from the front panel display. A1:FM 88.9 MHz The displayed station has been stored as A1. 48 En LISTENING TO FM BROADCASTS Notes – Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under the same preset number. – The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. ■ Recalling the preset stations If you have stored the preset stations based on “Presetting radio stations”, you can recall them using the following procedures. 1 Press TUNER on the remote control. “FM” appears in the front panel display. 2 Press PRESET/CH to select preset tuning mode. Hint 6 3 Use A-E/CAT. E). / OTHER FUNCTIONS If a colon(:) appears, the system is set to preset tuning mode. to select the preset group (A to 4 Use PRESET/CH / number you want (1 to 8). to select the preset A1:FM 88.9 MHz Preset group and number Preset FM station Hint You can specify the preset number using Numeric keypad 0-9 by switching FUNC./10KEY to 10KEY. English 49 En LISTENING TO XM® SATELLITE RADIO BROADCASTS XM Satellite Radio offers an extraordinary variety of commercial-free music, plus the best in sports, news, talk and entertainment. XM is broadcast in superior digital audio from coast to coast. From rock to reggae, from classical to hip hop, XM has something for every music fan. XM Satellite Radio online information For U.S. customers: http://www.xmradio.com/ For Canadian customers: http://www.xmradio.ca/ XM READY legal disclaimer XM monthly service subscription sold separately. XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock required (each sold separately) to receive XM service. It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate or otherwise make available any technology or software incorporated in receivers compatible with the XM Satellite Radio System. Installation costs and other fees and taxes, including a one-time activation fee may apply. All fees and programming subject to change. Channels with frequent explicit language are indicated with an XL. Channel blocking is available for XM radio receivers by calling 1-800-XMRADIO (U.S. residents) and 1877-GETXMSR (Canadian residents). XM service only available in the 48 contiguous United States and Canada. ©2008 XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved. ■ Connecting XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock Connect XM Mini-Tuner and XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock (sold separately) to the XM terminal on the rear panel of subwoofer/system control. For details, see the operating instructions provided with the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock. SIRIUS XM XM Mini-Tuner and XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock (sold separately) 50 En Hint To ensure optimal reception of the XM Satellite Radio signals, the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock must be placed at or near a southerly facing window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. You can mount it indoors or outdoors. Use the “ANTENNA INFO” information in the front panel display to check the antenna reception level and adjust the orientation of the antenna. Notes – If “CHECK ANTENNA” or “CHECK XM TUNER” appears in the front panel display, the connection and setting of the antenna, XM MiniTuner Home Dock, or XM Mini-Tuner may not be correct. – If “UPGRADE” and “XM TUNER” appear in sequence in the front panel display, the connected XM Mini-Tuner is incompatible with this unit. ■ Activating XM Satellite Radio Once you have installed the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock, inserted the XM Mini-Tuner, connected the XM MiniTuner Home Dock to your XM Ready® home audio system, and installed the antenna, you are ready to subscribe and begin receiving XM programming. There are three places to find your eight characters XM Radio ID: On the XM Mini-Tuner, on the XM Mini-Tuner package, and on XM Channel 0. Record the XM Radio ID in the following eight squares for reference. Note The XM Radio ID does not use the letters “I”, “O”, “S” or “F”. Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in the U.S. online at http://activate.xmradio.com/ or call 1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800- 967-2346). Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in Canada online at https://activate.xmradio.ca/ or call 1-877-GET-XMSR (1-877-438-9677). You will need a major credit card. XM will send a signal from the satellites to activate the full channel lineup. Activation normally takes 10 to 15 minutes, but during peak busy periods you may need to keep your XM Ready home audio system on for up to an hour. When you can access the full lineup on your XM Ready home audio system you are done. LISTENING TO XM® SATELLITE RADIO BROADCASTS ■ Basic XM Satellite Radio operations DVX-700 WP87010 STANDBY/ON MOVIE TV STB FUNC. 10KEY MUSIC STEREO ENHANCER When using Numeric keypad 0-9 SPORTS GAME NIGHT SLEEP DISP. MODE AUDIO DELAY ZOOM ON POWER Switch FUNC./10KEY to 10KEY All Channel Search mode Numeric keypad 0-9 1 Press SRCH MODE repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH”. ON SCREEN 2 Press PRESET/CH / repeatedly to search for a channel within all channels. BLUETOOTH OFF AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE AUTO/ MANUAL MEMORY LOCK SRCH MODE TOP MENU PRESET/CH – To select a channel by category, refer to “Category Search mode” on page 51. – To select a channel from the preset channels, refer to “Preset Search mode” on page 51. – To select the desired channel directly by entering the channel number, refer to “Direct number access mode” on page 52. Hint You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding PRESET/CH / . MENU 6 INFO. ENTER SETUP A-E/CAT. 1 Press SRCH MODE repeatedly to select “CAT SEARCH”. RETURN TV/ STB TV VOL CODE SET 2 Press A-E/CAT. channel category. VOLUME TV INPUT TUNER MUTE DVD/ USB INPUT 1-4 DOCK / repeatedly to change the 3 Press PRESET/CH / repeatedly to search for a channel within the selected channel category. 1 Press TUNER repeatedly to select “XM” as the input source. The XM indicator lights up in the front panel display and the XM Satellite Radio information (such as channel number, channel name, category, and artist name/song title) for the currently selected channel appears in the front panel display. Lights up 001 Preview Hint Hint You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding PRESET/CH / . Preset Search mode Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search mode, you must preset XM Satellite Radio channels. For details, refer to “Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset channels” on page 52. Hint The initial factory setting of all preset channels (A1 to E8) is “001 Preview”. When you select “XM” as the input source, this unit automatically recalls the previously selected channel. 1 Press SRCH MODE repeatedly to select “PRESET SEARCH”. Note 2 Press A-E/CAT. / repeatedly to change the preset channel group (A to E). If a status message or an error message appears in the front panel display, refer to the “XM Satellite Radio” section in “Troubleshooting” on page 68 for appropriate remedies. 3 Press PRESET/CH / repeatedly to change the preset channel number (1 to 8). Hint You can also select the preset channel number directly by pressing the Numeric keypad 0-9. 51 En English 2 Search for a channel by using one of the XM Satellite Radio search modes. – To select a channel from the all channel list, refer to “All Channel Search mode” on page 51. OTHER FUNCTIONS Category Search mode A-E/CAT. LISTENING TO XM® SATELLITE RADIO BROADCASTS Direct number access mode 1 Press SRCH MODE on the remote control repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH” or “CAT SEARCH”. 2 Press MEMORY. The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel display for approximately 30 seconds. Flashes 2 Press the Numeric keypad 0-9 to enter the desired 3-digit channel number. For example, to select the channel “123”, enter 123 using Numeric keypad 0-9. Hints Note – To enter a 1-digit or 2-digit channel number, press the Numeric keypad 0-9 on the remote control and then press ENTER to confirm the input number. – Instead of pressing ENTER to tune into the channel immediately, you can wait a few seconds until this unit confirms the entered channel number. You must proceed to and carry out steps 3 and 4 while the MEMORY indicator is flashing in the front panel display. 3 Press PRESET/CH / repeatedly to select a preset channel group and number (A1 to E8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The preset channel number appears in the front panel display. ■ Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset channels You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite Radio channels (A1 to E8: 8 preset channel numbers in each of the 5 preset channel groups). You can recall any preset channel easily by selecting the preset channel group and number as described in “Preset Search mode” on page 51. SRCH MODE TOP MENU AUTO/ MANUAL PRESET/CH MEMORY MENU INFO. A-E/CAT. ENTER SETUP A-E/CAT. RETURN TV/ STB CODE SET Flashes C5 043 XMU Selected preset channel group and number Hint You can select the preset station group (A to E) by pressing A-E/CAT. / repeatedly. 4 Press MEMORY to set the selected XM Satellite Radio channel as a preset channel while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. A colon (:) appears next to the preset channel number for confirmation, and the MEMORY indicator turns off in the front panel display. Goes off 1 Search for a channel you want to set as a preset channel by using one of the XM Satellite Radio search modes. Refer to “Basic XM Satellite Radio operations” on page 51 for details. C5:043 XMU Colon (:) 043 XMU Currently selected channel number 52 En Note Once you set a new preset channel, the one previously stored in the same preset channel group and number is overwritten. LISTENING TO XM® SATELLITE RADIO BROADCASTS ■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information You can display the XM Satellite Radio information (such as channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or song title) for the currently selected channel in the front panel display. SRCH MODE TOP MENU AUTO/ MANUAL PRESET/CH MEMORY – To hold the current XM Radio information, press ENTER on the remote control while it is being displayed. The HOLD indicator flashes in the front panel display while you are holding the XM information. Press ENTER again to release the held information. – When the antenna of the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock cannot receive the signals, “NO SIGNAL” appears in the front panel display. MENU INFO. A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. ENTER SETUP RETURN TV/ STB CODE SET 6 Note OTHER FUNCTIONS If a status message or an error message appears in the front panel display, refer to the “XM Satellite Radio” section in “Troubleshooting” on page 68 for appropriate remedies. Press INFO. repeatedly to toggle between the following XM Satellite Radio information display modes. CHANNEL INFO e.g.) 043 XMU Channel number/name CATEGORY INFO e.g.) ROCK Channel category SONG INFO e.g.) Coldplay / Sp Artist name / Song title ANTENNA INFO e.g.) 043 ANT: - Channel number/Antenna reception level DSP PROG. INFO e.g.) STEREO Sound field program Back to “CHANNEL INFO” Hints English – The front panel display can indicate up to 14 alphanumeric characters at once. If the information contains more than 14 alphanumeric characters, it starts scrolling. – If the XM Satellite Radio information contains a character that cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be displayed with a space. 53 En LISTENING TO SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO™ BROADCASTS SIRIUS Satellite Radio provides over 130 channels of exclusive entertainment and 100% commercial-free music. Only SIRIUS has more than 65 original music channels, from today’s hits to R&B, oldies, and classical masterpieces. From authentic country and real bluegrass to cool jazz, hot latin, reggae, rock and many more. Best of all, it’s all 100% commercial-free. SIRIUS also has more than 55 channels of world-class sports, news and entertainment. Included as part of your subscription, you get up to 16 NFL games a week, up to 40 NBA games a week and up to 40 NHL games a week. (Games are broadcast during their respective seasons.) Coupled with great sports news from ESPN, the SIRIUS sports offering is unrivaled. And don’t forget a host of other great news and entertainment, like NPR, CNBC, Fox News, Radio Disney and E! Entertainment Radio. For more information, visit http://www.sirius.com/. SIRIUS Satellite Radio legal disclaimer SIRIUS is available in the U.S.A. for subscribers with addresses in the continental U.S.A. and is available in Canada for subscribers with a Canadian address. To Get SIRIUS Satellite Radio a subscription and compatible tuner and antenna are required and sold separately. Visit sirius.com for the most complete and up-to-date channel lineup and information. “SIRIUS” and the SIRIUS dog logo and related marks are trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc. ■ Connecting the SiriusConnect™ tuner Connect the SiriusConnect tuner (sold separately) to the SIRIUS terminal on the rear panel of the unit. For details, see the operating instructions provided with the SiriusConnect tuner. DOCK SIRIUS XM SiriusConnect tuner and the antenna (sold separately) AN DC T 5V To the AC wall outlet Hints – To ensure optimal reception of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio signals, the antenna of the SiriusConnect tuner must be placed at or near a window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. The orientation of the antenna for the best reception differs depending on the area. Refer to the instruction manuals supplied with the SiriusConnect tuner for the installation of the antenna. You can mount it indoors or outdoors. – Use the “ANTENNA INFO” information in the front panel display to check the antenna reception level and adjust the orientation of the antenna. – You need to connect the SiriusConnect tuner to the AC wall outlet. Notes – If “CHECK SR TUNER” or “ANTENNA ERROR” appears in the front panel display, the connection of the SiriusConnect tuner or antenna is incorrect. In such cases, check the connection of the SiriusConnect tuner and the antenna. – If “NOT SUPPORTED” appears in the front panel display, the unit does not support the connected SiriusConnect tuner. 54 En LISTENING TO SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO™ BROADCASTS ■ Activating SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ subscription Before using the SIRIUS Satellite Radio feature, you need to activate your SIRIUS Satellite Radio subscription. To activate the subscription you need the Sirius ID which is uniquely assigned to the SiriusConnect tuner. Sirius ID is a 12-digit number and it appears on the package of the SiriusConnect tuner, on the label of the SiriusConnect tuner, and when you tune into the SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel “0” (see below). TV FUNC. MOVIE MUSIC STEREO ENHANCER POWER STB 10KEY SPORTS GAME NIGHT SLEEP When using Numeric keypad 0-9 Switch FUNC./10KEY to 10KEY Numeric keypad 0-9 DISP. MODE AUDIO DELAY ZOOM ON SCREEN BLUETOOTH OFF LOCK AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE SRCH MODE AUTO/ MANUAL MEMORY TOP MENU PRESET/CH Hint ■ Basic SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ operations 1 Press TUNER repeatedly to select “SIRIUS” as the input source. The SIRIUS indicator lights up in the front panel display and the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information (such as channel number, channel name, category, and artist name/song title) for the currently selected channel appears in the front panel display. MENU Flashes INFO. A-E/CAT. ENTER SETUP A-E/CAT. RETURN TV/ STB TV VOL 6 OTHER FUNCTIONS ON SIRIUS Satellite Radio online information Contact for activation URL: https//activate.siriusradio.com/ Phone: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474) Status messages appear in the front panel display during the activation. Once the activation is finished, “SUB UPDATED” appears. DVX-700 WP87010 STANDBY/ON 3 Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to activate your subscription. 184 SIRIUS Wea CODE SET VOLUME TV INPUT TUNER MUTE DVD/ USB INPUT 1-4 DOCK Displaying the Sirius ID of your SiriusConnect™ tuner 1 Press TUNER repeatedly to select “SIRIUS” as the input source. 2 Press “0” (on the Numeric keypad 0-9) and ENTER to display the Sirius ID of your SiriusConnect tuner. “000 Sirius IDxxxxxxxxxxxx” (“xxxxxxxxxxxx” indicates the 12-digit Sirius ID of your SiriusConnect tuner) appears in the front panel display. Hints – You can also display the Sirius ID by entering “000”. – To scroll the message again, press INFO.. When you select “SIRIUS” as the input source, this unit automatically recalls the previously selected channel. Notes – When you have not activated your subscription yet, you can only select “184” or “000”. – If a status message or an error message appears in the front panel display, refer to the “SIRIUS Satellite Radio” section in “Troubleshooting” on page 69 for appropriate remedies. 2 Search for a channel by using one of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio search modes. – To select a channel from the all channel list, refer to “All Channel Search mode” on page 56. – To select a channel by category, refer to “Category Search mode” on page 56. – To select a channel from the preset channels, refer to “Preset Search mode” on page 56. – To select the desired channel directly by entering the channel number, refer to “Direct number access mode” on page 56. ID___________________________ 55 En English Write the Sirius ID below. Hint LISTENING TO SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO™ BROADCASTS 3 Press PRESET/CH / repeatedly to change the preset channel number (1 to 8). Hints – If you tune into a channel that you do not subscribe, “CALL 888-539-SIRIUS TO SUBSCRIBE CH xxx” appears in the front panel display. To scroll the message again, press INFO.. – You can set the SIRIUS Satellite Radio preset channels (Page 57). – You can display the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information in the front panel display (Page 59). All Channel Search mode 1 Press SRCH MODE repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH”. 2 Press PRESET/CH / repeatedly to search for a channel within all channels. Hints – You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding PRESET/CH / . – You can skip channels to the previous or next category by pressing A-E/CAT. / . Category Search mode 1 Press SRCH MODE repeatedly to select “CAT SEARCH”. 2 Press A-E/CAT. channel category. / repeatedly to change the 3 Press PRESET/CH / repeatedly to search for a channel within the selected channel category. Hint You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding PRESET/CH / . Note The system skips the channels when the system is All Channel Search mode or Category Search mode in the following cases (it is not malfunction of the system): – the channel is locked (page 58). – the channel is out of service. – you do not subscribe to the channel. Preset Search mode Before selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search mode, you must preset SIRIUS channels. Refer to “Setting the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ preset channels” on page 57 for details. 1 Press SRCH MODE repeatedly to select “PRESET SEARCH”. 2 Press A-E/CAT. / repeatedly to change the preset channel group (A to E). 56 En Hint You can also select the preset channel number directly by pressing the Numeric keypad (1 to 8). Direct number access mode 1 Press SRCH MODE on the remote control repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH” or “CAT SEARCH”. 2 Press the Numeric keypad 0-9 to enter the desired 3-digit channel number. For example, to select the channel “123”, enter 123 using Numeric keypad 0-9. Hints – To display the Sirius ID number displayed in the front panel display, select channel “0”. – To enter a 1-digit or 2-digit channel number, press the Numeric keypad 0-9 and then press ENTER to confirm the input number. – Instead of pressing ENTER to tune into the channel immediately, you can wait a few seconds until the system confirms the entered channel number. – If the selected channel is locked, “PIN:___” appears in the front panel display. Enter the 4-digit Parental Lock code number by using the Numeric keypad 0-9 or press LOCK to cancel (Page 58). LISTENING TO SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO™ BROADCASTS ■ Setting the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ preset channels The preset channel number appears in the front panel display. Flashes LOCK SRCH MODE TOP MENU AUTO/ MANUAL PRESET/CH MEMORY Currently selected preset channel group and number INFO. A-E/CAT. A1 023 Hair Na MENU ENTER SETUP A-E/CAT. RETURN TV/ STB CODE SET 1 Search for a channel you want to set as a preset channel by using one of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio search modes. Refer to “Basic SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ operations” on page 55 for details. You can select the preset station group (A to E) by pressing A-E/CAT. / repeatedly. 4 Press MEMORY to set the selected SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel as a preset channel while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. A colon (:) appears next to the preset channel number for confirmation, and the MEMORY indicator turns off in the front panel display. Goes off A1:023 Hair Na 6 OTHER FUNCTIONS You can use this feature to store up to 40 SIRIUS Satellite Radio channels (A1 to E8: 8 preset channel numbers in each of the 5 preset channel groups). You can recall any preset channel easily by selecting the preset channel group and number as described in “Preset Search mode” on page (Page 56). Hint Colon (:) 001 SIRIUS Hit Currently selected channel number Note Once you set a new preset channel, the one previously stored in the same preset channel group and number is overwritten. 2 Press MEMORY. The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel display for approximately 30 seconds. Flashes Note You must proceed to and carry out steps 3 and 4 while the MEMORY indicator is flashing in the front panel display. 3 Press PRESET/CH / repeatedly to select a preset channel group and number (A1 to E8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. English 57 En LISTENING TO SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO™ BROADCASTS ■ Setting the Parental Lock You can use the Parental Lock feature to limit the access to the desired SIRIUS Satellite channels. The system automatically skips the locked channels when the system is in the All Channel Search mode or Category Search mode and you search a channel by pressing PRESET/CH / . MOVIE STB FUNC. 10KEY MUSIC STEREO ENHANCER POWER When using Numeric keypad 0-9 SPORTS GAME NIGHT SLEEP Switch FUNC./10KEY to 10KEY Numeric keypad 0-9 DISP. MODE AUDIO DELAY ZOOM ON ON SCREEN BLUETOOTH OFF AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE AUTO/ MANUAL MEMORY LOCK SRCH MODE TOP MENU PRESET/CH PIN________ Hints DVX-700 WP87010 STANDBY/ON TV 4 Press A-E/CAT. / to select the place you want to change, then enter a number by pressing Numeric keypad 0-9. Complete the other places using the same procedure. Keep the parental lock code number secure. You need it the next time you change the number again. – To cancel the setting, press LOCK during the setting. – If you forget the password, restore to the factory defaults. Refer to “System menu” on page 65 for details. – Each time you enter a number, the cursor moves to the next place. – You can change the number by moving the cursor to the place again. 5 Press ENTER to confirm the setting. MENU PIN:1234 INFO. A-E/CAT. ENTER SETUP RETURN TV/ STB TV VOL TV INPUT A-E/CAT. CODE SET OK 6 Select a channel you want to lock. Refer to “Basic SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ operations” on page 55 for details. VOLUME TUNER MUTE L001 SIRIUS Hi Locking/Unlocking channels Use this feature to set the Parental Lock code number (PIN) and select the channels to be locked. 7 Press ENTER to set the parental lock. Once the parental lock is set, the channel number is displayed with asterisk “*”. 1 Press TUNER repeatedly to select “SIRIUS” as the input source. 2 Press LOCK. “PARENTAL LOCK” appears in the front panel display. 3 Press ENTER. “NEW PIN:0000” appears. L001*SIRIUS Hi Hint Each time you press ENTER, lock (asterisk “*” appears) and unlock (asterisk “*” disappears) switches in sequence. 8 Repeat the steps 6 and 7 to lock other channels. NEW PIN:0000 9 Press LOCK to return to the original display. Hint Hint If the Parental Lock code number is already set, “PIN:___” appears instead of “NEW PIN:0000”. To cancel the parental lock using the same procedures as when you have locked the channel. Once the lock is canceled, the asterisk “*” disappears. Note If a SiriusConnect tuner is not connected to the unit, “Not Available” appears. 58 En LISTENING TO SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO™ BROADCASTS Tuning into the locked channels You can tune into the locked channels by the Direct number access mode or preset tuning mode. When you tune into the locked channel, following message appears in the front panel display. Enter the code number you set for the parental lock feature by using Numeric keypad 0-9. Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information in the front panel display Press INFO. repeatedly to toggle between the following SIRIUS Satellite Radio information display modes. CHANNEL INFO CATEGORY INFO PIN:____ e.g.) 008 Big '80s Channel number/name e.g.) Pop Channel category Notes – Enter each code number within 10 seconds. – If the entered code number is incorrect, “Wrong” appears in the front panel display. – To cancel the tuning, press LOCK. SONG INFO e.g.) Sanumemo / Roa Artist name / Song title COMPOSER INFO Composer name You can display the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information (such as channel number, channel name, category, artist name, composer name, or song title) for the currently selected channel in the front panel display. ANTENNA INFO PRESET/CH MENU - Channel number/Antenna reception level DSP PROG. INFO TOP MENU e.g.) 043 ANT: OTHER FUNCTIONS ■ Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ information 6 e.g.) Frankie Zipper e.g.) STEREO Sound field program INFO. A-E/CAT. SETUP ENTER Back to “CHANNEL INFO” A-E/CAT. RETURN CODE SET Note If a status message or an error message appears in the front panel display, refer to the “SIRIUS Satellite Radio” section in “Troubleshooting” on page 69 for appropriate remedies. Hints – The front panel display can indicate up to 14 alphanumeric characters at once. If the information contains more than 14 alphanumeric characters, it starts scrolling. – If the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information contains a character that cannot be recognized by the system, the character will be displayed with a space. – To hold the current SIRIUS Satellite Radio information, press ENTER on the remote control while it is being displayed. The HOLD indicator flashes in the front panel display while you are holding the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information. Press ENTER again to release the held information. – When the antenna of the SiriusConnect tuner cannot receive the signals, “ACQUIRING” appears in the front panel display. – When an information is unavailable, “----” appears. English 59 En USING OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT ■ Using iPod™ Once you have stationed your iPod in the Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10/ YDS-11, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of the subwoofer/system control (Page 20), you can enjoy playback on your iPod. Supported iPod iPod (Click and Wheel) iPod touch iPod nano iPod mini Battery charge feature This system charges the battery of an iPod stationed in the Yamaha iPod universal dock connected to the DOCK terminal of the subwoofer/system control while this system is turned on. Stationing your iPod in the Yamaha iPod universal dock Once you station your iPod in the Yamaha iPod universal dock, “iPod connected” and the DOCK indicator appear in the front panel display. Notes – Some features may not be available depending on the model or the software version of your iPod. – For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display, Refer to the “iPod” section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” (Page 67). – Be sure to set the volume to minimum before docking or removing your iPod. PLAY MODE CLEAR LOCK SRCH MODE TOP MENU AUTO/ MANUAL PRESET/CH MEMORY MENU INFO. A-E/CAT. ENTER SETUP A-E/CAT. RETURN TV/ STB CODE SET CH TV VOL 60 En VOLUME TV INPUT TUNER MUTE DVD/ USB INPUT 1-4 DOCK DOCK Set the input source to DOCK. Playback control buttons Controls the connected iPod. h: Play/pause (Normal mode), Play (Menu browse mode) e: Play/pause (Normal mode), Pause (Menu browse mode) s: Stop b / a: Skip backward/forward. When you press b just after a song has started, skip backward to the beginning of the previous song. w / f: Search backward/forward. Cursor buttons ( / / / Navigates the menus on your iPod. – Press )/ENTER to move to a previous menu level. – Press / lower menu. to move the cursor to an upper/ – Press ENTER or to confirm the selected menu. – Press ENTER in the “Songs” level menu screen to play the selected song. INFO. Switches between simple remote mode and menu browse mode. Controlling your iPod in simple remote mode Docking your iPod in the Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 or YDS-11, sold separately) enters simple remote mode. You can perform the basic operations of your iPod (play, stop, skip backward/ forward, etc.) using the supplied remote control in this mode. Hint Operations can be also done with the controls on your iPod. Refer to the instruction manuals of your iPod for information about these operations. USING OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT Controlling your iPod in menu browse mode Song information and play lists are displayed in the front panel display so that you can select and play back songs or adjust settings using the supplied remote control in this mode. Notes – Operations cannot be done with the controls of your iPod. – Characters that cannot be displayed in the front panel display are replaced with underscores “_”. ■ Using Bluetooth™ components You can connect the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately) to the DOCK terminal of the subwoofer/system control and enjoy the music contents stored in your Bluetooth component (such as a portable music player or computer equipped with a Bluetooth transmitter, etc.) without connecting it to the system. You need to perform “pairing” of the connected Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and your Bluetooth component in advance. ON BLUETOOTH OFF AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE 1 Press INFO. to enter menu browse mode. PLAY MODE 2 Press / / / repeatedly to select the desired menu, and then press ENTER to play back the selected song. Playlists Level 1 Playlist Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 SRCH MODE TOP MENU AUTO/ MANUAL PRESET/CH MENU INFO. Song list Artists Artist list Album list Albums Album list Song list Songs Song list Genres Genre list Artist list Album list Composers Composer list Album list Song list A-E/CAT. Song list ENTER SETUP Settings 6 MEMORY OTHER FUNCTIONS Options CLEAR LOCK RETURN TV/ STB Song list A-E/CAT. CODE SET CH TV VOL VOLUME TV INPUT TUNER MUTE DVD/ USB INPUT 1-4 DOCK Setting list Shuffle Use this feature to set the system to play songs or albums in random order. Options: Off, Songs, Album You can switch each option by pressing ENTER. – Select “Off” to deactivate this feature. – Select “Songs” to set the system to play songs in random order. – Select “Album” to set the system to play albums in random order. Repeat Use this feature to set the system to repeat one song or a sequence of songs. Options: Off, One, All You can switch each option by pressing ENTER. – Select “Off” to deactivate this feature. – Select “One” to set the system to repeat one song. – Select “All” to set the system to repeat a sequence of songs. DOCK Set the input source to DOCK. BLUETOOTH ON / BLUETOOTH OFF – Start or cancel the pairing. – Connect or disconnect a Bluetooth component. Playback control buttons Control the playback of a Bluetooth component. h: Play e: Pause s: Stop b / a: Skip backward/forward English Note The contents of the iPod menu vary, depending on the model or the generation. 61 En USING OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT Pairing the Yamaha Bluetooth™ wireless audio receiver and your Bluetooth™ component Pairing must be performed before using a Bluetooth component with the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver connected to the system for the first time or if the registered pairing data has been deleted. “Pairing” refers to the operation of registering a Bluetooth component for Bluetooth communications. To ensure security, a time limit of 8 minutes is set for the pairing operation. Please read and fully understand all the instructions before starting. 1 Connect the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver to the DOCK terminal of the subwoofer/ system control. (Page 20) 2 Press DOCK to set the input source to DOCK. 3 Turn on the Bluetooth component you want to pair with, and then enter pairing mode. Refer to the instruction manual of your Bluetooth component for details. 4 Press and hold BLUETOOTH ON for more than 3 seconds to start pairing. “Searching...” appears when the pairing starts. While the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver is in pairing mode, the DOCK indicator flashes in the front panel display. Note The Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver can be paired with up to eight Bluetooth components. When pairing is conducted successfully with a ninth component and the pairing data is registered, the pairing data for another least recently used component is deleted. Establishing a connection After the pairing is completed, perform the connecting operation on the system or on the Bluetooth component to enable communication between them. The connecting operation on the system is only available for the most recently connected Bluetooth component. 1 Press DOCK to set the input to DOCK. 2 Press BLUETOOTH ON to start a connection. “Searching...” appears in the front panel display. When the system finds the last connected Bluetooth component, “BT connected” appears in the front panel display for 3 seconds. Hints – If the system cannot find the last connected Bluetooth component, “Not found” appears in the front panel display. – If you want to establish a connection with a Bluetooth component other than the one most recently connected to, connect from that Bluetooth component. Refer to the instruction manual of your Bluetooth component for details. Hint Disconnecting To cancel the pairing, press BLUETOOTH OFF. Press DOCK, and then BLUETOOTH OFF to disconnect the system from the Bluetooth component. “Disconnected” appears in the front panel display. 5 Check that the Bluetooth component detects the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver. If the Bluetooth component detects the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver, the audio receiver name (“YBA-10 YAMAHA” for example) appears in the device list of the Bluetooth component. 6 Select the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver in the device list of the Bluetooth component, and then enter the pass key “0000” on the Bluetooth component. When the pairing procedure is successful, “Completed” appears in the front panel display. Hints – If the pairing is not completed within 8 minutes, “Not found” appears and the DOCK indicator is turned off in the front panel display. – If the pairing is canceled during the pairing, “Canceled” appears in the front panel display. 62 En Playing back the Bluetooth component You can play back your Bluetooth component using the supplied remote control. You can also play back your Bluetooth component by operating it directly. Hint Operation using the remote control is available only when the connection is established between the Bluetooth component you want to play back and the system. USEFUL OPERATION USEFUL OPERATION ■ Adjusting the audio delay FPD TV images sometimes lag behind the sound. You can use this function to delay the sound output to synchronize it with the video image. DVX-700 WP87010 STANDBY/ON TV FUNC. MOVIE MUSIC STB ■ Listening at low volume (night listening mode) Night listening mode enables you to listen to dialog or vocals more clearly at lower volume by suppressing louder sound effects. This function is useful when playing sources with wide dynamic range of the sound at night. POWER Switch FUNC./10KEY to FUNC. 10KEY SPORTS GAME NIGHT SLEEP DVX-700 WP87010 STANDBY/ON TV STEREO ENHANCER FUNC. MOVIE DISP. MODE AUDIO DELAY ZOOM MUSIC TOP MENU SUBTITLE PRESET/CH ANGLE SPORTS GAME NIGHT SLEEP DISP. MODE AUDIO DELAY ZOOM MENU RETURN CODE SET Lights up 1 Press AUDIO DELAY to enter adjusting mode. 2 Press / to adjust the delay time. Options: 0 to 240 ms You can adjust the delay time by the 10 ms. DELAY 120ms Setting value 3 Press AUDIO DELAY again or ENTER to exit adjusting mode. NIGHT ON 7 USEFUL OPERATION Press NIGHT. “NIGHT ON” appears in the front panel display. The NIGHT indicator lights up when night listening mode is selected. A-E/CAT. ENTER ON SCREEN BLUETOOTH INFO. SETUP Switch FUNC./10KEY to FUNC. 10KEY BLUETOOTH OFF AUDIO A-E/CAT. POWER ON SCREEN STEREO ENHANCER ON STB Hints – To cancel night listening mode, press NIGHT again. – When this function is on, compressed music enhancer mode is automatically set to off. (Page 45) – The setting is set for all the input sources. Hints – The default setting is 0 ms and “DELAY OFF” appears in the front panel display. – The system memorizes the settings assigned to each input source. Notes If you do not operate this function within 30 seconds after entering adjusting mode, the system automatically exits adjusting mode. English 63 En USEFUL OPERATION ■ Adjusting the audio balance for the playback ■ Changing the brightness of the front panel display You can adjust the volume balance of the virtual speakers and subwoofer. You can change the brightness of the front panel display. You can also turn off the front panel display to view a movie in a darker environment. TOP MENU PRESET/CH MENU STEREO ENHANCER NIGHT SLEEP INFO. A-E/CAT. ENTER SETUP DISP. MODE AUDIO DELAY ZOOM A-E/CAT. ON RETURN BLUETOOTH OFF AUDIO MUTE DVD/ USB DOCK POSITION AREA SOUND SUBTITLE ANGLE CODE SET TV/ STB TUNER TV INPUT INPUT 1-4 ON SCREEN TEST 1 Press SOUND repeatedly to select the item you want to adjust. Each time you press SOUND, the item changes to subwoofer, center and surround. PLAY MODE CLEAR LOCK Press DISP. MODE repeatedly. Each time you press DISP. MODE, the brightness of the front panel display changes. Bright SWFR Adjusts the output level of the subwoofer channel. CENTER Adjusts the output level of the center virtual speaker channel. SUR. Adjusts the output level of the surround virtual speaker channels. 2 Use / to adjust the volume balance. You can adjust the balance from +6 to –6. Hints – The volume balance setting for the virtual surround speaker is assigned to both left and right channels. – You can also adjust the speaker volume while the test tone is output. (Page 45) – The setting is set for all the input sources. Note You cannot check the volume balance of the center virtual speaker and surround virtual speaker when the surround mode is off. Set the surround mode to on to check the volume balance. 64 En Dark * Selecting “DISPLAY OFF” turns off the front panel display. Before it turns off, “DISPLAY OFF” appears briefly in the front panel display. The front panel display lights up momentarily when any operation is performed while DISPLAY OFF is selected. Hints – The default setting is DIMMER OFF. – Only the power indicator remains lit in DISPLAY OFF mode. USEFUL OPERATION ■ Setting the sleep timer ■ System menu The sleep timer function sets the system to the standby mode automatically at the preset time. This feature allows you to initialize the settings (such as DVD setting) or change the HDMI audio output settings by opening a specialized menu (system menu) for this purpose. STEREO ENHANCER NIGHT DISP. MODE AUDIO DELAY ZOOM ON SLEEP ON SCREEN BLUETOOTH OFF AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE PLAY MODE CLEAR LOCK 1 Set the system to standby mode. 2 Press and hold INPUT and e on the DVD controller, then press STANDBY/ON. Keep holding INPUT and e until “SYSTEM MENU” appears in the front panel display. The system menu appears on the front panel display. Press SLEEP repeatedly until the desired turn-off time is displayed. The preset time appears on the front panel display. Flashes SYSTEM MENU 3 Press SLEEP 120min 90 min. 60 min. 30 min. OFF Select [OFF] to cancel the sleep timer. to select the item you want. 1:DVD 7 INIT 1:DVD INIT Resets the settings for DVD settings to the initial factory settings. 2:HDMI INIT Resets the settings for HDMI settings to the initial factory settings. 3:HDMI A ON Select if the audio signal is output from the HDMI terminal. Select [ON] to output the audio signal to HDMI components such as TV. USEFUL OPERATION 120 min. / 4:HDMI A OFF Select if the audio signal is output from the HDMI terminal. Select [OFF] not to output the audio signal to HDMI components such as TV. 5:SIRIUS P.CLR (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Clears the parental lock code for the SiriusConnect tuner. 4 Press ENTER to confirm. “*” is displayed on the left side of the selected item in the front panel display. Each time you press ENTER, set (asterisk “*” appears) and cancel (asterisk “*” disappears) switches in sequence. The settings will be activated the next time you turn on this unit. Press STANDBY/ON to set the system to the standby mode, then turn on the power again. – If you select other items before the system is set to the standby mode, the item you confirmed is canceled. 65 En English Hints USEFUL OPERATION – The next time you turn on the system after selecting an item between 1 and 4 in the system menu, the system starts with DVD as an input source. ■ Setting the preset code You can use the remote control to control the power, TV input, channel, and volume for up to two components, such as TV or Set top box (STB). Set the preset codes depending on the components. Hint The preset cords are set to “298” (TV) and “748” (STB) as the default settings. DVX-700 WP87010 STANDBY/ON TV FUNC. MOVIE MUSIC STEREO ENHANCER STB 10KEY SPORTS GAME NIGHT SLEEP DISP. MODE AUDIO DELAY ZOOM ON POWER Switches TV or STB. ON SCREEN BLUETOOTH OFF AUDIO A-E/CAT. SUBTITLE ENTER SETUP ANGLE A-E RETURN TV/ STB CODE SET 1 Switch TV/STB to the side you want to set. 2 Press and hold CODE SET, then press POWER. 3 Point the remote control toward the remote control sensor on the DVD controller and enter a 3-digit code while holding CODE SET. Refer to “LIST OF PRESET CODES” on the appendix for the corresponding codes. 4 Release CODE SET. If the preset cord is set correctly, “PRESET OK!” appears in the front panel display. Note If you have failed to set the preset code, “PRESET NG!” appears in the front panel display. Try to set it again. Hints – When you select the preset cord for “cable” or “DBS”, you can use only POWER and CH +/–. If a preset cord for “TV” is set on the other side, you can use TV VOL +/– or TV INPUT to control TV. – To set another preset code, switch TV/STB to the other side and repeat the step 2 to step 4. Operating a TV/STB Once you set the preset code, you can operate your TV/ STB. 1 Switch TV/STB to the side, which the preset code is set. 2 Press the button you want to operate. 66 En ADDITIONAL INFORMATION TROUBLESHOOTING If there is any problem with your unit, check the following items. If you cannot solve your problem with the following remedies or if your problem is not listed below, turn off the system and unplug the unit, then consult the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. General Problem Power turns on but immediately shuts off. The speakers make no sound. Cause Remedy See page The power cable may be connected improperly. Make sure the power cable is plugged into the outlet firmly. 20 A speaker cable may be shorted. Make sure all speaker cables are connected properly. 14 This system may have received a strong electrical shock, such as from a lightening bolt or excessive static electricity. Set this system to standby mode, and then disconnect the power cable. Wait for about 30 seconds, connect the power cable, and then turn the system on again. 20, 22 The volume may be set to minimum level. Adjust the volume level. 5, 10 The mute function may be activated. Cancel the mute function. The input source or input setting may be incorrect. Select the correct input source or input setting. 10 The cables may be connected improperly. Make sure all cables are connected properly. 14 Sound is too low on one side. The cables may be connected improperly. Make sure all cables are connected properly. 14 Speaker channels other than the front ones make no sound. You may be listening to stereo sounds without surround mode. Press a surround mode button to enable the sound field effect. 43 The virtual speaker channel makes no sound. The volume of the center virtual speaker channel may be set to minimum level. Adjust the volume level of the center virtual speaker channel. 64 The volume of the surround virtual speaker channels may be set to minimum level. Adjust the volume level of the surround virtual speaker channels. 64 The subwoofer makes no sound. The volume of the subwoofer channel may be set to minimum level. Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer. 64 Sound is poor (noisy). A speaker cable may be shorted. Make sure all cables are connected properly. 14 This system does not operate properly. This system may receive a strong electrical shock, such as from a lightening bolt or excessive static electricity, or drop in power supply. Set this system to standby mode, and then disconnect the power cable. Wait for about 30 seconds, connect the power cable, and then turn on this system. The system control cable may be connected improperly. Connect the system control cable firmly. 14 A digital or high-frequency equipment produces noises. The system may be placed close to digital equipment or high-frequency equipment. Place this system farther away from such equipment. -- The remote control does not operate the system. The system may be outside the remote control operation range. For information on the remote control operation range, refer to “Using the remote control”. 21 The remote control sensor of this system may be exposed to direct sunlight or lighting. Change the lighting. -- The batteries may be worn out. Replace the batteries. 21 5, 10 8 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 20, 22 English 67 En TROUBLESHOOTING Problem The picture is not displayed on the TV screen. The picture is not displayed on the TV screen correctly. The message “HDMI ERROR” is displayed or the picture is not displayed on the HDMI TV screen. Cause Remedy See page The TV cables may be connected improperly. Make sure all cables are connected properly. 17 If the COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT and HDMI connections are used simultaneously, the COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT jacks may output progressive video signal regardless of the Component Out setting. Disconnect the HDMI component, or connect a TV that supports progressive video to the COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT jacks. 18 The Video Output settings may be incorrect. Check the Video Output settings and correct as necessary. 38 The Component Out setting is set to Progressive, but the TV connected to the COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT may not support progressive scanning. Change the Component Out setting to Interlace. 38 The TV connected to the HDMI OUTPUT terminal may not support the selected resolution. Change the HDMI Resolution setting to a resolution supported by the HDMI TV. 38 The wrong HDMI resolution may be selected or an HDMI error may have occurred. Check the HDMI Resolution setting and correct as necessary. 38 Reset the HDMI settings. 65 Tuner (FM) Problem FM stereo reception is noisy. Cause Remedy See page The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away, or if the antenna quality is poor. Check the antenna connections. 18 Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. -- Use the manual tuning method. 46 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained, even with a good FM antenna. There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multi-path interference. -- The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. -- Use the manual tuning method. 46 XM Satellite Radio If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear in the front panel display. In this case, read the causes and follow the corresponding remedies. Status message Cause Remedy See page CHECK XM TUNER The XM Mini-Tuner is not installed in the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock or the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock is not connected to this unit. Confirm the XM Mini-Tuner is fully seated in the dock and check that the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock cable is connected to this unit. 50 CHECK ANTENNA The XM antenna is not connected to the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock or the XM antenna cable has become damaged. Check that the XM antenna is securely connected to the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock and check the antenna cable for damage. Replace the XM antenna if the cable is damaged. 50 68 En TROUBLESHOOTING Status message See page Cause Remedy LOADING The XM Mini-Tuner is acquiring audio or program information from the XM satellite signal. This message can also occur in weak XM signal conditions. Note that this unit may not respond to some operations while this message is displayed. This message should disappear in a few seconds in good signal conditions. If you see this message often, reposition the XM antenna to get better signal reception. Use the “ANTENNA INFO” information in the front panel display or “XM Information” screen in the video monitor to check the antenna reception level. 53 NO SIGNAL The XM Mini-Tuner is not receiving the XM satellite signal. Something may be blocking the XM antenna view of the satellites or the antenna is not properly aimed. Check for antenna obstructions and reposition the XM antenna to get better signal reception. Use the “ANTENNA INFO” information in the front panel display or “XM Information” screen in the video monitor to check the antenna reception level. See instructions supplied with the XM Mini-Tuner and Dock for antenna installation information. 53 OFF AIR The XM channel you selected is not currently broadcasting. Check back at a later time; in the mean time, select another channel. -- CH UNAUTH You may be attempting to tune to an XM channel that is blocked or that you cannot receive with your XM subscription package. Consult the latest channel guide at http://www.xmradio.com/ (US residents) and http://www.xmradio.ca/ (Canadian residents) for the current list of channels. For information on receiving this channel, visit http:// www.xmradio.com/ (US residents) and http://www.xmradio.ca/ (Canadian residents) or contact XM Satellite Radio at 1-800-967-2346 (US residents) and 1-877-438-9677 (Canadian residents). -- 8 The selected channel is not available. The channel may have been reassigned to a different channel number. This message may occur initially with a new XM Mini-Tuner that has not received XM signal for an extended period. Consult the latest channel guide at http://www.xmradio.com/ (US residents) and http://www.xmradio.ca/ (Canadian residents) for the current list of channels. For the case of a new XM Mini-Tuner that has not received XM signal for an extended period, allow the XM Mini-Tuner to receive the XM satellite signal for at least 5 minutes and then try to select the channel again. -- ---- No artist name or song title is available for this selection. No action required. -- UPGRADE XM TUNER This unit does not support the connected XM Mini-Tuner. Connect a XM Mini-Tuner that is compatible with XM Rev 4x. -- ADDITIONAL INFORMATION CH UNAVAIL SIRIUS Satellite Radio If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear in the front panel display. In this case, read the causes and follow the corresponding remedies. Status message ANTENNA ERROR Cause The antenna is not connected to the SiriusConnect tuner properly. Remedy Check the connection of the antenna and SiriusConnect tuner. See page 54 English 69 En TROUBLESHOOTING Status message CHECK SR TUNER Cause Remedy See page The SiriusConnect tuner is not connected to the SIRIUS terminal of this unit correctly. Check the connection of the SiriusConnect tuner and this unit. 54 The SiriusConnect tuner is not connected to the AC wall outlet. Connect the power cable of the SiriusConnect tuner to the AC wall outlet. 54 NOT SUPPORTED This unit does not support the connected SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuner. Connect the SiriusConnect tuner that is compatible with this unit. -- ACQUIRING The signal is too weak. Adjust the orientation of the antenna of the SiriusConnect tuner. Use the “ANTENNA INFO” information in the front panel display or “SIRIUS Information” screen in the video monitor to check the antenna reception level. 59 UPDATING The SiriusConnect tuner is updating the channel list. Wait until the updating is completed. -- The period of the subscription is end. Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to renew the subscription. -- F/W UPDATING The SiriusConnect tuner is updating the firmware. Wait until the updating is completed. -- CALL SIRIUS (CALL 888-539-SIRIUS TO SUBSCRIBE) The selected channel is not subscribed. Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to subscribe the selected channel. URL: https://activate.siriusradio.com/ Phone: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474) -- Select another channel. -- SUB UPDATED The subscription information is updated. -- -- INVALID The selected channel is currently out of service. Select another channel. -- Not Available The operation you made is not available. -- -- iPod Status message Cause Remedy See page Unknown iPod The iPod being used is not supported by this system. Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod touch, iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported. -- iPod connected Your iPod is properly stationed in the Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 or YDS-11, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this system, and the connection between your iPod and this system is completed. -- -- Disconnected Your iPod was removed from the Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 or YDS-11, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this system. Station your iPod back in the Yamaha iPod universal dock (YDS-10 or YDS11, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this system. 20 Note In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing in the front panel, check the connection to your iPod. 70 En TROUBLESHOOTING Bluetooth Status message Searching... Cause Remedy See page The Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately) and the Bluetooth component are in the process of the pairing. -- -- The Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and the Bluetooth component are in the process of establishing the connection. -- -- The pairing is completed. -- -- Canceled The pairing is canceled. -- -- Not found The system cannot find the Bluetooth component while performing the pairing or trying to connect to the Bluetooth component. -- -- BT connected The connection between the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and the Bluetooth component is established. -- -- Disconnected The Bluetooth component is disconnected from the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver. -- -- Not Available The pairing is performed when the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver is connected to the Bluetooth component. Perform the pairing when the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver is not connected to the Bluetooth component. 61 Note In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing in the front panel, check your Bluetooth component. Disc Problem Cause Remedy See page Not all discs support all of the disc playback functions of this unit. Try another disc. 2 Playback does not start, the sound or picture is distorted or playback is stopped halfway. The disc is not properly set. Place the disc, label-side up. 26 The disc is dirty. Check the disc and clean as necessary. 2 The loaded disc in not supported. Use only supported disc formats. The Disc that is not compliant with the CD Audio specification (e.g. copy control CD, the non-DVD side of the DualDisc, etc.) may not play. 2 Condensation on the pickup lens. When this system is moved from a cold environment to a warm one, condensation may form on the pickup lens. Wait for one to two hours for the condensation to evaporate, then try again. -- The Resume/Last memory function is effective. Press s twice to set the Resume function to off. 29 Reset the DVD setting to the initial factory settings (DVD INIT) to clear the resume point. 65 After loading a DVD-Video, the same picture is usually displayed and you cannot move to the main contents or the main menu. 71 En English Some functions do not work. 8 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Completed TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cannot select foreign language soundtracks or subtitles. Cause Remedy See page The loaded disc does not contain foreign language soundtracks or subtitles. See the disc packaging for details on foreign language soundtracks and subtitles. -- The loaded disc does not allow this operation. Select foreign language soundtracks or subtitles in the disc menu. 28 Subtitles are turned off. Select a subtitle. 29 The loaded disc does not contain subtitles. See the disc packaging for details on subtitles. -- When using A-B repeat playback, subtitles outside of the specified section may not be displayed. Turn off A-B repeat playback. 30 Cannot select camera angles. The loaded disc does not contain multiple camera angles. See the disc packaging for details on multiple camera angles. -- Cannot play some files. Only MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC, and JPEG files with no copy protection (DRM) can be played. Use files with no copy protection. -- The file is not supported. Use only supported file format. Cannot record a DVD. The DVD is copy protected. Most DVD-Video discs are copy protected and cannot be recorded. -- The TV picture is disturbed. The picture may be disturbed while rewinding or fast forwarding. This is not a malfunction. -- The picture is stretched or black bars are displayed. The TV Screen setting is set incorrectly. Check the TV Screen setting and change as necessary. 38 Ghosting appears in some areas of the picture. The video material is incompatible with the Progressive Scanning function due to the way in which it was edited or the type of material it is. Change the Component Out setting to Interlace. 38 The disc ejected as soon as it was loaded. The loaded disc in not supported. Use only supported disc formats. 2 The message “No Disc” is displayed even though a disc is loaded. The disc is not properly inserted into the disc slot. Insert the disc, label-side up into the disc slot. 26 Cannot display the DVD setup menu, Initial Settings, and Video Adjust menus. These menus can be displayed only when DVD as the input source is selected. Select DVD as the input source. 5, 9 Subtitles are not displayed. 26, 27, 33 USB Problem Cannot play content stored on a USB mass storage device. Cannot play some files. 72 En Cause Remedy See page Not all USB storage devices are recognized by this unit. Try another USB storage device. -- Only USB storage devices formatted with FAT16 or FAT32 are supported. Reformat the USB storage device with FAT16 or FAT32. -- The USB storage device is connected to a USB hub, but this unit does not support USB hubs. Connect the USB storage device directly to the USB port of this unit. 35 Only MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC, and JPEG files with no copy protection (DRM) can be played. Use files with no copy protection. -- The file is not supported. Use only supported file format. 33 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem The message “NO USB” or “USB ERROR” is displayed. Cause The USB device is not compatible, or this unit cannot supply enough power to the device for it to function properly. Remedy Turn this unit off and on again. See page 22 Set this unit to standby, disconnect the USB storage device, and then reconnect it. 22, 35 Select the USB input source, and then connect the USB device. 35 Select a different input source and select USB again. 35 If the USB storage device came with its own power adapter, use it to power the USB storage device while connecting to this unit. -- If the message still appears, the USB storage device is probably incompatible with this unit. -- 8 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 73 En GLOSSARY AAC (Advanced Audio Coding) An audio compression scheme defined as part of the MPEG-2/MPEG-4 standard. AAC supports up to 48 channels and generally achieves better sound quality than MP3 at the same bit rate. Analog Sound that has not been turned into numbers. Analog sound varies, while digital sound has specific numerical values. These terminals send audio through two channels, the left and right. Aspect ratio The ratio of vertical and horizontal sizes of a displayed image. The horizontal vs. vertical ratio of conventional TVs. is 4:3, and that of wide-screens is 16:9. Bit Short for binary digit. Represents the smallest unit of information manipulated on a computer. In audio systems, the bit size determines resolution to digitize analog signals. The larger the bit size, the larger the dynamic range (the ratio of maximum and minimum frequency level) and the finer the sounds. Generally, an audio CD is 16 bit and DVD audio is 24 bit. Bit rate The amount of data used to hold a given length of music; measured in kilobits per second, or kbps. Also, the speed at which you record. Generally, the higher the bit rate, or recording speed, the better the sound quality. However, higher bit rates use more space on a disc. Component Video Terminals for inputting or outputting a component video signal.Component video signal consists of three lines, the luminance signal (Y) and two color difference signals (PB/CB, PR/CR), which enable to provide highquality video. Disc menu A screen display prepared for allowing selection of images, sounds, subtitles, multi-angles, etc. recorded on a DVD. DivX® DivX® is a popular media technology created by DivX, Inc. DivX® media files contain highly compressed video with high visual quality that maintains a relatively small file size. DivX® files can also include advanced media features like menus, subtitles, and alternate audio tracks. Many DivX® media files are available for download online, and you can create your own using your personal content and easy-to-use tools from DivX.com. DivX® Ultra DivX® Ultra Certified products provide enhanced playback of advanced media features supported by the DivX® Media Format. Key features include interactive video menus, subtitles, alternate audio tracks, video tags, and chapter points. 74 En DMF (DivX®Media Format) The DivX® Media Format supports advanced media features, adding controls for an interactive media experience: interactive video menus, chapter points, multi-language subtitles, and alternate audio tracks. Dolby Digital Digital surround sound system which is developed by Dolby Laboratories provides completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (left, center, and right) and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides five full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects (called LFE, or low frequency effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. Dolby Pro Logic II It is an improved matrix decoding technology that provides better spatiality and directionality on Dolby Surround programmed material; provides a convincing three-dimensional soundfield on conventional stereo music recordings; and is ideally suited to bring the surround experience to automotive sound. While conventional surround programming is fully compatible with Dolby Pro Logic II decoders, soundtracks will be able to be encoded specifically to take full advantage of Pro Logic II playback, including separate left and right surround channels. (Such material is also compatible with conventional Pro Logic decoders). DTS (Digital Theater Systems) Digital surround sound system developed by Digital Theater Systems, Inc., which provides 5.1 channel audio (max). With an abundance of audio data, it is able to provide authentic-sounding effects. HDMI HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video interface. Providing an interface between any source (such as a set-top box or AV controller) and an audio/video monitor (such as a digital television), HDMI supports standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as multi-channel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC (Advanced Television Systems Committee) HDTV standards and supports 8-channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to accommodate future enhancements and requirements. When used in combination with HDCP (Highbandwidth Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video interface that meets the security requirements of content providers and system operators. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “www.hdmi.org/”. GLOSSARY Interlace The most common type of scanning used in televisions. It divides a screen into even and odd numbered fields for scanning, and then builds an image by combining them into one image (frame). JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group) A standardized image compression system proposed by the Joint Photographic Experts Group. It can reduce image data sizes to 1 to 10% of their original sizes, and works on digital photographs effectively. MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer-3) An audio file compression technology. It can reduce audio data sizes to about 10% of their original sizes while maintaining CD-level audio quality. MPEG (Moving Pictures Experts Group) International standard for digital video and audio compression generated by ISO (International Organization for Standardization) and IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). Includes MPEG-1, MPEG-2, and MPEG-4. MPEG-1 offers VHS level video quality and is often used on video CDs. MPEG-2 offers S-VHS level video quality and is often used on DVDs. Parental lock (On DVD) Limits Disc play according to the age of the users or the limitation level in each country. The limitation varies from disc to disc; when it is activated, playback will be prohibited if the software’s level is higher than the user-set level. (On Sirius Satellite Radio) Limits the channel (channel skip) to protect children from inappropriate contents. The limitation is set by channel basis. 8 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Playback control (PBC) An on-screen menu recorded on a Video CD or Super Video CD that enables interactive playback and searching. Progressive Scan A method of displaying all scanning lines in a frame at once, reducing flicker noticeable on a larger screen and creating a sharp and smooth image. Region code Many DVD discs include a region code so that the copyright owner can control DVD software distribution only to regions where they are ready to distribute. There are six regions codes, which restrict a DVD player to playing a DVD disc with the same region code. Surround A controller for creating realistic three-dimensional sound fields full of realism by arranging multiple speakers around the listener. VR format (Video Recording format) A DVD video recording format, which allows editing DVD video data recorded onto a disc. You need a VR format compatible player for playback. English 75 En SPECIFICATIONS DVR-700 Amplifier Section Input Others ............................................................................................. USB: 1 Output Video .....................................................................................Composite: 1 Component: 1 HDMI: 1 Others ........................................................................System Connector: 1 Dimensions (W x H x D)................................................ 360 x 68 x 224 mm Weight ................................................................................................. 2.6 kg Maximum Power SP OUT......................................................70 W [6 Ω, 1 kHz, 10 %THD] Subwoofer ................................................70 W [6 Ω, 100 Hz, 10 %THD] Minimum RMS Output Power SP OUT........................................................55 W [6 Ω, 1 kHz, 1 %THD] Subwoofer ..................................................55 W [6 Ω, 100 Hz, 1 %THD] Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance AUX................................................................................... 350 mV/32 kΩ Maximum Input Signal AUX...............................................................≥ 2.2 V [1 kHz, DSP=Thru] Frequency Response SP OUT.......................................................................-2.0 ± 1 dB [20 Hz] 0 dB [1 kHz] -0.5 ± 1 dB [20 kHz] S / N Ratio SP OUT.......................................... ≥ 82 dB [1 kHz, 18.5 V/6 Ω, Analog] SP OUT........................................... ≥ 98 dB [1 kHz, 18.5 V/6 Ω, Digital] [IHF-A Network] Total Harmonic Distortion SP OUT...........................≤ 0.06 % [1 kHz, Analog, Digital 20 kHz-LPF] Residual Noise ............................................................... SP OUT: ≤ 138 uV NS-P700 Woofer.................................................................... 5.5 cm cone woofer x 2, Magnetic shielding type Tweeter........................................................2.5 cm Balanced dome tweeter, Magnetic shielding type Input Power (Nominal/Maximum)........................................... 40 W/100 W Frequency Response............................................ 130 Hz – 20 kHz (-10 dB) Dimensions (W x H x D) Excluding stands ........................................................... 95 x 190 x 98 mm Including stands/Upright position ............................... 95 x 206 x 106 mm Including stands/Horizontal position ........................ 190 x 111 x 106 mm Weight .................................................................. 1.2 kg (Excluding stands) NS-PSW700 Type..................................................................................... Bass reflex type 16.5 cm cone, Magnetic shielding type Frequency Response.............................................. 35 Hz – 130 Hz (-10 dB) Dimensions (W x H x D).............................................. 194 x 450 x 400 mm Weight .................................................................................................. 13 kg Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models].......................................... AC 120 V, 60 Hz [Asia, Europe, Russia models]....................................... AC 230 V, 50 Hz [Taiwan model] .............................................................. AC 110 V, 60 Hz [Australia model] ........................................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz Power Consumption ............................................................................. 50 W Standby Power Consumption (reference data)....................... Less than 1 W INPUT Analog Audio ............................................................... Pin Jack: 1 (AUX) Digital Audio..............................................................................Coaxial: 1 Optical: 2 DOCK: 1 (YDS-10, YDS-11, YBA-10) FM Antenna terminal: 1 XM Tuner: 1 (U.S.A., and Canada model only) Sirius Tuner: 1 (U.S.A., and Canada model only) OUTPUT Analog Audio .................................................................. SPEAKER OUT Others ........................................................................System Connector: 1 76 En DVD Section Video Output....................................................... Composite: 1 Vp-p (75 Ω) Y Output/Component Video Output ..................Component: 1 Vp-p (75 Ω) PB Output/Component Video Output..............Component: 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω) PR Output/Component Video Output..............Component: 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω) Tuner Section FM Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models]........................................ 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Other models] ......................................................... 87.50 to 108.00 MHz Radio Data System Function (Europe and Russian model only) Other Section SOUND FIELD................................... MOVIE, MUSIC, SPORTS, GAME Surround mode Night listening mode Extended stereo Compressed music enhancer VIRTUAL SURROUND PROCESSOR ....... AIR SURROUND XTREME AUDIO DECODE.......................Dolby Digital / Dolby Pro Logic II / DTS Speakers distance mode .......................................... Wide / Normal /Narrow Specifications are subject to change without prior notice. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION INDEX ■ A A-B repeat playback ............................ 30 AIR SURROUND XTREME .............. 43 Angle Indicator, Display menu ............ 41 angle selection ...................................... 29 ANGLE, remote control ...................... 10 ANTENNA terminal, subwoofer/system control rear panel ............................... 8 AREA, remote control ......................... 10 AUDIO DELAY, remote control ........... 9 audio file playback ............................... 33 Audio language .................................... 25 Audio Language, Language menu ....... 40 AUDIO, remote control ....................... 10 AUTO indicator, front panel display ..... 7 Automatic station preset, FM ............... 47 ■ B battery insertion, remote control .......... 21 Bluetooth component listening ............ 61 brightness of front panel display .......... 64 Brightness, Video Adjust menu ........... 37 ■ C ■ D E EJECT, front panel .................................5 ejecting disc ..........................................28 ENHANCER indicator ...........................7 ENHANCER, remote control .................9 ENTER, remote control .......................10 extended stereo mode ...........................45 external AV component connection .....19 ■ F FM antenna connection ........................18 FM listening .........................................46 FM tuning operation .............................46 front panel display brightness ..............64 Front panel display, DVD controller ......7 Front panel display, front panel .............5 Front panel, DVD controller ..................5 FUNC./10KEY, remote control .............9 ■ G GAME, AIR SURROUND XTREME .........................................43 GAME, remote control ...........................9 Gamma, Video Adjust menu ................37 ■ H HDMI Color, Video Output menu .......39 HDMI component connection ..............18 HDMI OUTPUT terminal, DVD controller rear panel ...........................6 HDMI Resolution, Video Output menu .................................................39 Hue, Video Adjust menu ......................37 ■ I Initial Setting menu ..............................38 initialization ..........................................65 INPUT 1 OPTICAL jack, subwoofer/ system control rear panel ...................8 INPUT 2 OPTICAL jack, subwoofer/ system control rear panel ...................8 INPUT 3 COAXIAL jack, subwoofer/ system control rear panel ...................8 INPUT 4 ANALOG jacks, subwoofer/ system control rear panel ...................8 Input selection buttons, remote control ..............................................10 INPUT, front panel .................................5 INPUT, remote control .........................10 inserting batteries, remote control ........21 iPod content playback ..........................60 J JPEG file slide show ............................ 34 ■ L language preference setting ................. 25 Language, Initial Setting menu ............ 40 Level Change, Parental Lock .............. 42 Lights up when compressed .................. 7 listening area shifting .......................... 44 ■ M Manual station preset, FM ................... 48 Manual tuning, FM .............................. 46 MEMORY indicator, front panel display ............................................... 7 menu browse mode, iPod .................... 61 MENU, remote control ........................ 10 MOVIE, AIR SURROUND XTREME ........................................ 43 MOVIE, remote control ......................... 9 MUSIC, AIR SURROUND XTREME ........................................ 43 MUSIC, remote control ......................... 9 MUTE, remote control ........................ 10 ■ N NIGHT indicator, front panel display ... 7 NIGHT, remote control ......................... 9 Numeric keypad, remote control ........... 9 ■ O ON SCREEN, remote control ................ 9 On-screen display language ................. 25 Options, Initial Setting menu ............... 41 OSD language ...................................... 25 OSD Language, Display menu ............ 41 ■ P pairing to Bluetooth component .......... 62 Parental Lock, Options menu .............. 41 Password, Parental Lock ..................... 41 PBC ...................................................... 28 placing speakers ................................... 12 PLAY MODE, remote control ............ 10 playable disc .......................................... 2 playback control .................................. 28 playback controls ................................. 27 playing back audio file ........................ 33 playing disc .......................................... 26 playing DivX video ............................. 26 playing WMV file ................................ 26 POSITION, remote control ................. 10 power cable connection ....................... 20 Power cable, subwoofer/system control rear panel ........................................... 8 Power indicator, front panel .................. 5 POWER, remote control ........................ 9 preset code, remote control .................. 66 preset station, FM ................................ 47 program playback ................................ 31 77 En 8 English Decoder indicator, front panel display ... 7 Direct frequency tuning, FM ............... 47 disc ejection ......................................... 28 disc information displaying ................. 29 Disc loading slot, front panel ................. 5 disc menu ............................................. 28 Disc menu language ............................. 25 disc navigator ....................................... 32 disc playback ........................................ 26 DISP. MODE, remote control ................ 9 Display, Initial Setting menu ............... 41 displaying disc information ................. 29 distance between speakers setting ........ 44 DivX video playback ........................... 26 DivX VOD, Options menu .................. 42 ■ ■ ADDITIONAL INFORMATION CH, remote control .............................. 10 Chroma Level, Video Adjust menu ..... 37 CLEAR, remote control ....................... 10 CODE SET, remote control ................. 10 Component Out, Video Output menu ................................................ 38 COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT jacks, DVD controller rear panel ................. 6 compressed music enhancer ................. 45 connecting DVD controller .................. 16 connecting external AV component .... 19 connecting FM antenna ........................ 18 connecting HDMI component ............. 18 connecting power cable ....................... 20 connecting speakers ............................. 14 connecting TV ...................................... 17 connection ............................................ 14 Contrast, Video Adjust menu ............... 37 Country Code, Parental Lock ............... 42 DOCK indicator, front panel display .....7 DOCK terminal, subwoofer/system control rear panel ...............................8 DOCK, remote control .........................10 DVD controller connection ..................16 DVD Menu Lang., Language menu .....40 DVD setup menu ..................................36 DVD/USB, remote control ...................10 INDEX ■ R random playback .................................. 30 Rear panel, subwoofer/system control ... 8 Recalling preset station, FM ................ 49 Remote control ....................................... 9 Remote control sensor, front panel ........ 5 remote control using ............................ 21 repeat playback .................................... 30 resuming playback ............................... 29 RETURN, remote control .................... 10 ■ S search mode ......................................... 31 SETUP, remote control ........................ 10 Sharpness, Video Adjust menu ............ 37 shifting listening area ........................... 44 simple remote mode, iPod ................... 60 SLEEP indicator, front panel display .... 7 sleep timer ............................................ 65 SLEEP, remote control .......................... 9 slide show of JPEG file ........................ 34 SOUND, remote control ...................... 10 soundtrack language changing ............. 28 speaker connection ............................... 14 speaker layout ...................................... 11 speaker placement ................................ 12 SPEAKER terminals, subwoofer/system control rear panel ............................... 8 SPORTS, AIR SURROUND XTREME ......................................... 43 SPORTS, remote control ....................... 9 STANDBY/ON, front panel .................. 5 STANDBY/ON, remote control ............ 9 station preset, FM ................................ 47 STEREO indicator, front panel display ................................................ 7 STEREO, remote control ....................... 9 Subtitle Display, Language menu ........ 40 Subtitle language .................................. 25 subtitle language changing ................... 29 Subtitle Language, Language menu ..... 40 SUBTITLE, remote control ................. 10 supplied accessory ................................. 4 SYSTEM CONNECTOR terminal, DVD controller rear panel ........................... 6 SYSTEM CONNECTOR terminal, subwoofer/system control rear panel .................................................. 8 system menu ........................................ 65 ■ T TEST, remote control .......................... 10 TUNED indicator, front panel display ... 7 TUNER, remote control ....................... 10 tuning operation, FM ........................... 46 Turning on ............................................ 22 TV connection ...................................... 17 TV display setting ................................ 23 TV INPUT, remote control .................. 10 TV Screen, Video Output menu .......... 38 TV VOL, remote control ..................... 10 ■ U USB device using ................................. 35 78 En USB terminal, front panel ......................5 ■ V Video Adjust menu ..............................37 video input/output setting .....................23 VIDEO OUTPUT jack, DVD controller rear panel ............................................6 Video Output, Initial Setting menu ......38 virtual surround effect checking ..........45 VOLUME, front panel ...........................5 VOLUME, remote control ...................10 ■ W WMV file playback ..............................26 ■ Z ZOOM, remote control ..........................9 zooming in ............................................29 APPENDIX LIST OF PRESET CODES LISTE DES CODES PRÉDÉFINIS TV Brand name Yamaha Admiral Aiwa Akai Alba AOC Bell & Howell Bester Blaupunkt Blue sky Brandt Brocsonic Bush By Design Clatronic Craig Croslex Curtis Mathis Daewoo Daytron Dual Dwin Electrograph Emerson Ferguson First line Fisher Fraba Fujitsu Funai Gateway GE Goodmans Grundig Hitachi ICE Irradio Itt/Nokia JC Penny JVC Kendo KTV LG/Goldstar Loewe LXI Magnavox Marantz Matsui Medion Memorex TV Preset code 299, 292, 242, 285, 287, 253, 206 292, 293, 216 294, 276, 283, 284 295, 296 296 297 292 298 229, 222 298 223 297 296 201, 202 298 224 225, 298 297, 226 297, 298, 224, 227, 228, 215, 289 239 298 293, 281 289 297, 224, 239, 232 223, 265, 266 298 295, 233 298 290 277, 278 215, 289 293, 297, 234, 235, 236 296, 298, 223 229, 238, 249 297, 239, 242, 243, 285, 206 296 296 244, 245 293, 297, 234, 237, 240 296, 246, 247, 286 298 297, 239 297, 298, 239, 237, 240 298, 248, 207 293, 297, 225, 226, 233, 298 297, 225, 239, 298 298, 210 295 203, 204, 298 297, 216 Brand name Mitsubishi Nad NEC Nokia Nokia Oceanic Nordmende Onwa Panasonic Philco Philips Pioneer Portland Proscan Proton Quasar Radio Shack RCA Runco SABA Sampo Samsung Sanyo Schneider Scott Sharp Siemens Signature Sony Sylvania Symphonic Tatung Telefunken Thomson Toshiba V Videch Viewsonic VIZIO Wards Westinghouse Yamaji Zenith CABLE Preset code 299, 297, 259, 287 226, 255 297, 252, 282 244, 245 245 265, 266 296 234, 235, 236, 253, 288 297, 225, 239, 298 225, 205, 298 226, 235, 254, 255 297, 256 293, 221, 231, 241, 251 297, 250, 260, 270 234, 235 299, 293, 297 293, 297, 234, 256, 257, 258, 221 220, 230, 271 223, 269, 265, 266 281, 297, 280 297, 239, 248, 262, 275 295, 233, 279, 272, 273, 274, 212 296 297 292, 239, 232, 208 229 216, 292 263, 214 297, 225, 298 217, 218, 219, 291 215 269, 264, 265, 266 223, 266 292, 226, 267 209, 211, 215, 289 297, 242 209, 211, 289 209, 211, 213, 215, 268, 289 297, 239, 232, 216 211 298 216, 261, 271 Brand name ABC General Instrument Hamlin Hitachi Jerrold Preset code 739, 752, 753, 755, 758, 759, 762 722, 786, 787, 788 723, 724, 725, 726, 727 722 722, 728, 729, 732, 733, 734, 735, 736, 737 Magnavox 738 Motorola 748, 728 Oak 739, 742, 743 Panasonic 744, 745, 746, 747, 783, 784 Philips 763, 764, 765, 766, 767, 768 Pioneer 748, 785, 747 Radio Shack 749 RCA 744, 792, 793 Scientific Atlanta 752, 753, 754, 789 Sony 756, 757 Tocom 755 Universal 769, 772, 773, 774, 775 Viewstar 764, 766, 776, 777, 778, 779, 782 i LIST OF COUNTRY CODES LISTE DES CODES DE PAYS DBS Brand name Bell expressvu DirecTV Dish Network system Dishpro Echostar Expressvu GE General Instrument Goi Hitachi Houston HTS Hughes JVC Magnavox Panasonic Philips Primestar Proscan Radio Shack RCA Samsung SKY + SKY HD Sony Toshiba Uniden Zenith ii Preset code 822, 855 825, 832, 842, 843, 846, 848, 849, 856, 857, 858, 859, 862, 863, 864, 865, 866 822, 854, 855 822, 854 822, 854, 855 822 837, 838, 839, 857, 858 823 822 824 822 822 843, 844, 845, 846 822, 855 825 826, 829 825, 843, 844, 845, 846, 847, 848, 849, 822 827 837, 838, 839, 842 828, 822 837, 838, 839, 842, 822 852 853 853 832, 835 833, 836 825 834 Country/region Argentina Australia Austria Belgium Brazil Britain Canada Chile China Denmark Finland France Germany Hong Kong India Indonesia Italy Japan Korea Malaysia Mexico Netherlands New Zealand Norway Pakistan Philippines Portugal Russia Singapore Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan Thailand U.S.A. Country code ar 0118 au 0121 at 0120 be 0205 br 0218 gb 0702 ca 0301 cl 0312 cn 0314 dk 0411 fi 0609 fr 0618 de 0405 hk 0811 in 0914 id 0904 es 0920 jp 1016 kr 1118 my 1325 mx 1324 nl 1412 nz 1426 no 1415 pk 1611 ph 1608 pt 1620 ru 1821 sg 1907 es 0519 se 1905 ch 0308 tw 2023 th 2008 us 2119 LIST OF LANGUAGE CODES LISTE DE CODES DE LANGUES Language Abkhazian Afar Afrikaans Albanian Amharic Arabic Armenian Assamese Aymara Azerbaijani Bashkir Basque Bengali Bhutani Bihari Bislama Breton Bulgarian Burmese Byelorussian Cambodian Catalan Chinese Corsican Croatian Czech Danish Dutch English Esperanto Estonian Faroese Fiji Finnish French Frisian Galician Georgian German Greek Greenlandic Guarani Gujarati Hausa Hebrew Hindi Hungarian Icelandic Indonesian Interlingua Interlingue Inupiak Irish Lanruage code ab 0102 aa 0101 af 0106 sq 1917 am 0113 ar 0118 hy 0821 as 0119 ay 0125 az 0126 ba 0201 eu 0521 bn 0214 dz 0426 bh 0208 bi 0209 br 0218 bg 0207 my 1325 be 0205 km 1113 ca 0301 zh 2608 co 0315 hr 0818 cs 0319 da 0401 nl 1412 en 0514 eo 0515 et 0520 fo 0615 fi 0609 fi 0609 fr 0618 fy 0625 gl 0712 ka 1101 de 0405 el 0512 kl 1112 gn 0714 gu 0721 ha 0801 iw 0923 hi 0809 hu 0821 is 0919 in 0914 ia 0901 ie 0905 ik 0911 ga 0701 Language Italian Japanese Javanese Kannada Kashmiri Kazakh Kinyarwanda Kirghiz Kirundi Korean Kurdish Laotian Latin Latvian Lingala Lithuanian Macedonian Malagasy Malayalam Maori Marathi Moldavian Mongolian Nauru Nepali Norwegian Occitan Oriya Oromo Panjabi Pashto, Pushto Persian Polish Portuguese Quechua Rhaeto-Romance Romanian Russian Samoan Sangho Sanskrit Scots-Gaelic Serbian Serbo-Croatian Sesotho Setswana Shona Sindhi Sinhalese Siswati Slovak Slovenian Somali Lanruage code it 0920 ja 1001 jw 1023 kn 1114 ks 1119 kk 1111 rw 1823 ky 1125 rn 1814 ko 1115 ku 1121 lo 1215 la 1201 lv 1222 ln 1214 lt 1220 mk 1311 mg 1307 ml 1312 mi 1309 mt 1320 mo 1315 mn 1314 na 1401 ne 1405 no 1415 oc 1503 or 1518 om 1513 pa 1601 ps 1619 fa 0601 pl 1612 pt 1620 qu 1721 rm 1813 ro 1815 ru 1821 sm 1913 sg 1907 sa 1901 gd 0704 sr 1918 sh 1908 st 1920 tn 2014 sn 1914 sd 1904 si 1909 ss 1919 sk 1911 sl 1912 so 1915 Language Spanish Sudanese Swahili Swedish Tagalog Tajik Tamil Tatar Telugu Thai Tibetan Tigrinya Tonga Tsonga Turkish Turkmen Twi Ukrainian Urdu Uzbek Vietnamese Volapük Welsh Wolof Xhosa Yiddish Yoruba Zulu Lanruage code es 0519 su 1921 sw 1923 sv 1922 tl 2012 tg 2007 ta 2001 tt 2020 te 2005 th 2008 bo 0215 ti 2009 to 2015 ts 2019 tr 2018 tk 2011 tw 2023 uk 2111 ur 2118 uz 2126 vi 2209 vo 2215 cy 0325 wo 2315 xh 2408 ji 1009 yo 2515 zu 2621 iii UC LASER INFORMATION INFORMATION LASER ● The name plate is located on the rear panel of the DVD controller. Without top cover Sans couvercle supérieur DVX-700 ● La plaque signalétique se trouve sur le panneau arrière du lecteur de DVD. DVD HOME THEATER SYSTEM SYSTEME HOME CINEMA AVEC LECTUER DVD DVX-700 (DVR-700 + NS-PSW700 + NS-P700) OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI © 2008 All rights reserved. Printed in China WQ33520